Panasonic Integrated Communication eXchange

Panasonic Integrated Communication eXchange
3DQDVRQLF7HOHSKRQH6\VWHPV
www.voicesonic.com
Phone 877-289-2829
®
Section 700
Feature
Operation
Technical Manual
Issued September 1998
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice and do not constitute a
commitment on the part of Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI). Every effort
has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, due to ongoing product
improvements and revisions, Panasonic cannot guarantee the accuracy of printed material after
the date of publication, nor can it accept responsibility for errors or omissions. Panasonic will
update and revise this document as needed.
The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license pertaining to the said software or hardware.
Reproduction, publication, or duplication of this manual, or any part thereof, in any manner,
mechanically, electronically, or photographically, is prohibited without permission of the
Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI).
©Copyright 1998 by Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI)
All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 1. About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 2. List of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 3. System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
AEC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Call Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Exchange Line to Exchange Line Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Music/MOH Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building Block Expansion Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-In Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Progress Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrex/PBX Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
Class of Service - Exchange Line/Tie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Extension Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Exchange Line to Exchange Line Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
29
29
31
CO (Exchange Line) Ringing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Direct Inward Dial Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct In Line Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Inward System Access Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
32
32
32
CO (Exchange Line) Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX Model) . . . . . . . . .
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - ISDN BRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - ISDN-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - Loop Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
33
33
34
Computer Telephony Integration Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Day/Night System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Manual Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Automatic Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Digital Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Direct Inward System Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
3
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Doorphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Doorphone Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Extension Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Digital Key Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Device Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
41
41
41
41
Flexible Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Flexible Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Hunting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Back Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circular Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Next Extension/Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
43
44
44
44
Internal Hold Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Tenant Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music-on-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
45
46
46
46
Extension Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Network Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Network Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Extension Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tandem Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
53
53
53
53
Non-Blocking Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
54
54
54
Telephone Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
PC-Based Customizing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Ringing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Lamp Field Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slide Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
56
56
56
57
57
57
58
SSD TRS (Call Barring) Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
58
60
61
4
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Virtual Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Priority Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Transfer Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
63
64
64
65
65
Chapter 4. User Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
About User Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Set System Date/Time/Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Set Personal Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Set System Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Set System Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Set System Speed Dial Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Set Extension Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Set Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Set Call-Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Set Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Set Mode Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Set Special Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Set Exception Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Set Day of Week Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
111
112
112
113
114
115
5
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
116
117
118
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
121
122
122
123
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
126
127
127
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Caller ID Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Camp-on (Call Waiting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Three-Party Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Eight-Party Conferencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Display Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Large Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Small Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Changing the Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSS/72 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EM/24 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Dial Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
143
144
145
145
146
151
152
153
153
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
155
156
156
DSS/BLF Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Direct In Line Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Multi-Exchange Line (MCO) Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Message Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting / Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mute Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Touch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onhook Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
160
162
163
163
164
166
168
169
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Reset Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
174
176
177
Step Call (Reset Call). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Exchange Line Key Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Exchange Line Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Exchange Line Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
185
186
186
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
188
190
191
192
Chapter 6. DSLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Digital Single Line Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
199
199
200
201
202
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
203
204
205
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
7
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
207
208
209
209
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
212
213
213
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Three-Party Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Eight-Party Conferencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting / Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onhook Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
222
222
223
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Reset Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Direct Trunk (Exchange Line) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chapter 7. SLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
8
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
246
247
247
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
248
249
250
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
252
253
253
254
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
256
257
258
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Three-Party Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Eight-Party Conferencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Do-Not-Disturb (DND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting / Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
265
266
267
268
268
269
270
271
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Reset Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Direct Trunk (Exchange Line) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
9
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
10
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Chapter 1. About This Manual
If you are using this manual for a single System, make note of its software version in the following
table. This information may be referenced by technicians or owners of the System.
Software version information for systems shipped with this document
CPC Model:
Software Version:
Organization
This manual contains detailed descriptions of features. The feature descriptions are organized
according to the following categories:
Feature Categories
Description
System Features
System Features are either available on a systemwide basis or aid in the overall administration of the
System.
User Maintenance Features are used by the end user
to maintain the System. These items include setting
time and date, Personal Speed Dial (PSD) numbers
and names, System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers and
names, extension names, Verified ID codes, Call
Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, Message Key ID
codes, Mode schedule, Special Day mode, Exception Day mode, and Day of Week mode.
Key Telephone Features are available to System Key
phones. System Key phones are proprietary digital
sets that provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.
DSLT Features are available to Digital Single-Line
Telephones. DSLTs provide digital audio quality and
limited feature key access in a single-line set.
SLT Features are available on a standard analog
push button telephone set. Since SLTs are not
equipped with feature keys, most features are
accessed by using the dialpad and/or the switchhook.
User Maintenance
Key Telephone Features
Digital Single-Line Telephone (DSLT) Features
Single Line Telephone
(SLT) Features
Purpose
The purpose of this manual is to provide an overview of feature operations and requirements. Where
applicable, the following types of information are provided for each feature:
Types of information
Purpose
Description
Provides an overview of how the feature works and,
in some cases, what it is typically used for
Includes step-by-step instructions on how to use the
feature
Lists any special hardware that is required to use the
feature
Operation
Hardware Requirements
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
11
Chapter 1. About This Manual
Related Programming
Considerations
Section 700 - Operation
Lists the programming subsystems associated with
the feature
Provides details on feature interactions and limitations
Abbreviation List
ACD
ARS
BGM
BLF
BRI
CFWD
COS
DDI
DIL
DISA
DL
DND
DP
DSLT
DSS
DSU
DTMF
FF
MCO
MOH
PRI
PSD
SLT
SSD
TRS
LCR
12
Automatic Call Distributor
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Busy Lamp Field
Basic Rate Interface
Call Forward
Class of Service
Direct Inward Dial
Direct In Line
Direct Inward System Access
Direct Line
Do-Not-Disturb
Dial Pulse
Digital Single Line Telephone
Direct Station Selector
Digital Service Unit
Dual Tone Multifrequency
Flexible Function
Multiple CO (Pooled Trunk Access)
Music On Hold
Primary Rate Interface
Personal Speed Dial
Single Line Telephone
System Speed Dial
Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring)
Least Cost Routing
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Chapter 2. List of Features
This chapter contains the following tables which list the features available with the System:
Table
Page
System Features
14
Maintenance Features
15
Extension Features
15
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
13
Chapter 2. List of Features
Table 1.
Section 700 - Operation
System Features
Topic
14
Page
AEC Disconnect
22
Attendant Groups
22
Attendant Groups
22
Automatic Call Distributor
23
Automatic Route Selection
23
Automatic Exchange Line to Exchange Line Transfer
24
Background Music/MOH Separation
24
Battery Backup
25
Building Block Expansion Capability
25
Built-In Voice Mail
26
Call Progress Tones
26
Caller ID
27
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
27
Class of Service
28
CO (Exchange Line) Ringing Types
31
CO (Exchange Line) Interface
32
Computer Telephony Integration Capability
34
Data Security
34
Day/Night System Mode
35
Digital Pad
37
Direct Inward System Access
38
Distinctive Ringing
39
Doorphone
39
Extension Interface
40
Flexible Numbering Plan
42
Flexible Slot
42
Hunting Groups
43
Internal Hold Tone
45
MCO Tenant Group
45
Memory Backup
46
Music-on-Hold
46
Name Assignments
46
Network Facilities
52
Non-Blocking Architecture
53
Power Failure Transfer
54
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 2. List of Features
Topic
Page
Power On Maintenance
54
Programming Devices
54
Ringing Modes
55
SSD TRS (Call Barring) Override
58
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)
58
Ringing Modes
55
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access Groups
61
Virtual Port
61
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
62
Table 2.
Maintenance Features
Topic
Page
Set System Date/Time/Day
71
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
72
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
73
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
78
Set System Speed Dial Names
79
Set Extension Names
82
Set Verified Account Codes
83
Set Call-Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
85
Set Message Key ID Code
86
Set Mode Schedule
87
Set Special Day Mode
89
Set Exception Day Mode
95
Set Day of Week Mode
97
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes
99
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
100
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
101
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
102
Table 3.
Extension Features
Topic
Page
Account Codes
108
Attendant Group Calls
111
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
15
Chapter 2. List of Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
16
Page
Auto Repeat Dial
112
Background Music
112
Busy Override
113
Callback Request
114
Call Forwarding
115
Call Hold
119
Call Hold
123
Call Pickup
125
Call Transfer
128
Caller ID Call Log
131
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
136
Conference Calls
137
Display Information
140
Do-Not-Disturb
142
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
143
DSS/72 Console
144
EM/24 Console
145
Flash
145
Flexible Function Keys
146
Handsfree Answerback
151
Handsfree Operation
152
Headset Operation
153
Hot Dial Pad
153
Hot Line
154
Intercom Calling
155
Last Number Redial
156
Line Appearances
156
Message Key
160
Message Waiting / Callback
160
Mute Function
162
Offhook Monitor
163
Offhook Signalling
163
Offhook Voice Announce
164
One-Touch Keys
166
Onhook Dialling
168
Paging
169
Reset Call
170
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 2. List of Features
Topic
Page
Ringing Line Preference
171
Speed Dialling
171
Timed Reminder Call
183
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
184
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
187
Variable Mode
188
Voice Recognition
190
Volume Control
191
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
192
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
17
Chapter 2. List of Features
18
Section 700 - Operation
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Chapter 3. System Features
System Features are either available on a system-wide basis or aid in the overall administration of the
System.
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System Features:
Topic
Page
AEC Disconnect
22
Attendant Groups
22
Automatic Call Distributor
23
Automatic Route Selection
23
Automatic Exchange Line to Exchange Line Transfer
24
Background Music/MOH Separation
24
Battery Backup
25
Building Block Expansion Capability
25
Built-In Voice Mail
26
Call Progress Tones
26
Caller ID
27
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
27
Class of Service
28
Class of Service - Exchange Line/Tie
28
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction
29
Class of Service - Extension Feature
29
Class of Service - Exchange Line to Exchange Line
Restriction
31
CO (Exchange Line) Ringing Types
31
Direct Inward Dial Ringing
31
Direct In Line Ringing
32
Direct Inward System Access Ringing
32
Multiple Ringing
32
CO (Exchange Line) Interface
32
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - DDI (Not Available on
UK, TX or EX Model)
33
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - ISDN BRI
33
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - ISDN-PRI
33
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - Loop Start
34
Computer Telephony Integration Capability
34
Data Security
34
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
19
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
Page
Day/Night System Mode
35
Manual Day/Night Mode
36
Automatic Day/Night Mode
37
Digital Pad
37
Direct Inward System Access
38
Distinctive Ringing
39
Doorphone
39
Doorphone Sensor
40
Extension Interface
20
40
Digital Key Telephones
40
Analog Device Capability
41
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
41
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
41
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
41
Flexible Numbering Plan
42
Flexible Slot
42
Hunting Groups
43
Internal Hold Tone
45
MCO Tenant Group
45
Memory Backup
46
Music-on-Hold
46
Name Assignments
46
Extension Name Assignments
47
Speed Dial Name Assignments
50
Network Facilities
52
Network Call Transfer
53
Network Extension Calling
53
Network Paging
53
Network Call Routing
53
Tandem Connection
53
Non-Blocking Architecture
53
Power Failure Transfer
54
Power On Maintenance
54
Programming Devices
54
Telephone Programming
55
PC-Based Customizing Tool
55
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Topic
Page
Ringing Modes
55
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing
55
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
56
DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing
56
DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
56
Busy Lamp Field Ringing
57
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
57
Slide Ringing
57
Alarm Ringing
58
SSD TRS (Call Barring) Override
58
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)
58
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access Groups
61
SSD TRS (Call Barring) Override
58
Virtual Port
61
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold
62
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension
62
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
ICX-25-700
62
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
62
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
63
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code
64
High Priority Message Waiting
64
Message Key ID Code
65
Voice Mail Transfer Key
65
ICX issued September 1998
21
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
AEC Disconnect
Description
This feature allows the System to send a disconnect signal of 1 second to an analog device indicating
that the calling party has hung up (terminated the call). This feature is useful with a Third-party Voice
Mail or an Answering Machine. By default this feature is disabled.
Hardware Requirements
•
AEC port
Considerations
•
The 1 second time duration of the disconnect signal is fixed. (It cannot be changed.)
Attendant Groups
Description
An attendant phone is often used as a central answering point for other extensions. In addition,
attendant phones frequently have special capabilities for monitoring and programming extensions.
You can reach the assigned attendant group by dialling the feature access code for Attendant Calls
(usually 0). If an attendant phone is available but does not answer within a set time, the call will move
to the next available attendant phone. If all members of the attendant group are busy for a specified
time, the call can be forwarded to other extensions or another hunt group. The system allows up to 20
extensions to be included in an attendant group.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
22
The System allows one attendant group for each system mode (Day 1, Day 2, and Night).
An attendant group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several
phones can be made to ring at the same time.
Attendant groups can use only Pilot Terminal Hunt Group or Pilot Distributed Hunt Group. For
more information, see “Hunting Groups” on page 43.
The pilot number for an attendant group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated
as the pilot [not a real extension]).
If a member of the attendant group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that
phone is temporarily removed from the attendant group.
If a member of the attendant group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the
call goes to the next phone in the attendant group.
If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to
another hunt group or another extension.
Attendant groups support the following call types:
• CLI (Called Line Identification) / Direct Dial Inward (DDI)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Extension calls
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
• Private network attendant calls
• Call reversion
• Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group
Automatic Call Distributor
Description
The System provides an optional Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) for efficient presentation,
handling, and management of incoming calls to one or more groups of specialized users.
This optional Built-in ACD is contained on a single circuit card that is installed in the System. This
“built-in” capability eliminates the need for custom wiring and other installation.
Each specialized user is known as an ACD agent. Each agent position is equipped with a large display
telephone (VB-44225/VB-D411LDSUK) that provides Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) messages to
assist the agent in handling calls.
The Built-in ACD provides:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 2 agent groups
Up to 32 agent IDs per group
Up to 50 agent IDs per system
Up to 32 agents
1 supervisor ID per group
Up to 2 supervisor IDs per system
Up to 4 voice ports per group
Up to 4 voice ports per system
1 Music On Hold (MOH) source (Main System MOH source)
1 Management Information System (MIS) Monitor Port (RS-232C)
2-week memory for MIS reports
Up to 6 recorded messages (max. 14 sec. per message)
1 fixed message up to 5 minutes
Hardware Requirements
•
See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
Considerations
•
For more information, see Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
Automatic Route Selection
Description
When Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is enabled, the system follows a preselected route for calls.
Usually the selected routing is the least cost route.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
23
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
ARS works in conjunction with Toll Restriction Service (TRS (Call Barring)). Calls can be denied
based on the programmed TRS level for the originating party. (For more information, see “Ringing
Modes” on page 55.)
•
•
•
•
•
Three levels of ARS checking are available based on the dialled number following the ARS
access code:
• Direct Route Selection: The simplest form of ARS routing that upon ARS entry
(enter 9) directly selects an Exchange Line group and any dialled number
modification.
• Route List Selection: A more complex routing that includes up to 5 alternative
levels of route selection and includes TRS (Call Barring) level checking.
• Time List Selection: The most complex routing that determines the appropriate
route list based upon the day and time.
Forced ARS is available on an Extension Class of Service (COS) basis.
A special day list provides tailored ARS routing for up to 20 holidays, vacation days, etc.
Automatic modification of dialled numbers is available. This includes deleting up to 24 prefix
digits and adding up to a 10-digit prefix and a 10-digit suffix. The modification of dialled
numbers can include pauses, Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) conversion, itemized code
(extension number) and an authorization code. (Itemized code and authorization are not used
in some areas.)
Up to 8 authorization codes are available.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Automatic Exchange Line to Exchange Line Transfer
Description
The System can be set to automatically transfer exchange line calls out to another exchange line
without requiring the call to be answered internally. This transfer may be either exchange line based
or extension based (i.e., call forward outside).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Background Music/MOH Separation
Description
24
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Separate inputs are provided for Background Music and Music-on-Hold (MOH). This allows one
music or sound source to be used for background music and another music or sound source to be used
for music on hold.
A typical advantage of this is playing a pre-recorded promotional tape to held parties (since many
may be customers) while providing a selected background music for use in the office.
Hardware Requirements
•
Background music requires an SCC card (VB-44181). Both Background Music and Music on
Hold (if using external MOH) require a sound source.
Considerations
•
N/A
Battery Backup
Description
When backup batteries are installed, the System will continue to operate in the event of a power
failure. If using Battery Backup, backup batteries must be installed in each CCU.
A fully loaded system will operate at least 30 minutes on backup batteries.
Hardware Requirements
•
Back-up battery unit (VB-44025)
Considerations
•
Any device connected to the System but that does not derive its power from the System must
have a backup power source to operate. These devices include any System Message Detail
Recording (Call Logging) printer (or recorder), fax machine, answering machine, modem,
cordless telephone, etc.
Building Block Expansion Capability
Description
The System is designed to support easy expansion. Each CCU in the System supports 96 ports (12
flexible slots) as well as 2 option slots. Up to 6 CCUs may be installed in the System for a total of 576
ports.
Up to 2 expansion CCUs may be connected to a base CCU. When a fourth CCU is required, another
base CCU is installed. Up to 2 expansion CCUs may be connected to the second base CCU.
This building block approach allows you to easily add equipment when needed without a major
interruption in service or a major delay.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
25
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
In addition to the additional CCUs and related CCU hardware/cabling required for expansion,
when the System is expanded the CPC card and/or TSW cards may need to be upgraded as well.
The CPC96 supports up to 96 ports. The CPC288 supports up to 288 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW576.
Built-In Voice Mail
Description
The System supports the Built-in Voice Mail. This unit assists in providing reliable, effective
communications. This is a simple device that includes an automated attendant function and can be
used to record conversations (where permitted).
The Built-in Voice Mail is easy to install. It is installed in a CCU card slot and no cabling is required.
Some of the major features include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automated attendant
Automatic recording for incoming and outgoing calls
One-touch mail box transfer
Mail box status display (Key LED on digital telephone)
Mail box grouping
2-way recording
Outside notification
Date/time stamp
Integrated Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) control (with large LCD telephone)
Message light control
Up to 254 mail boxes
Up to 40 hours of message storage time
Up to 16 voice ports
For more information, see the System Built-In Voice Mail Reference Manual.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Progress Tones
Description
26
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
The System supplies a full array of call progress tones. These tones provide audible indications of the
status of calls and include dial tone, busy tone, ringback tone, error tone, confirmation tone, and
splash tone. The complete specification for these tones may be found in Section 300 - Installation.
In addition to call progress tones, Direct Station Select (DSS) LEDs and the display provide
additional indication of the status of calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Caller ID
Description
(Note: Analog Caller ID is not available in the UK model).
A properly equipped ICX supports Caller ID, a service offered by the network telephone service
provider. The Exchange Line sends calling number information to the ICX after the first ring. Users
who have display telephones can see Caller ID information as incoming calls ring at their extension
and can have access to previous calls via the Caller ID Call Log feature. The Caller ID number is
recorded in Call Logging.
Hardware Requirements
•
•
Loop-start exchange line card (VB-44510)
Caller ID circuit card (VB-44513)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
ISDN (PRI - T Point) can get calling party information.
Caller ID service must be ordered from the local telephone operating company or the
interexchange carrier.
Caller ID data is usually sent between the first and the second rings of the incoming exchange
line call. The exchange line may be programmed to immediately ring at the station or wait until
after the Caller ID digits are received before ringing at the station. If the exchange line is
programmed to ring immediately, the Caller ID digits will not display until after they are
received and processed.
Caller ID numbers may be denied from being sent for some callers (private). Some long distance
carriers may not provide Caller ID data (out of area).
Caller ID only support the single format (number only). Multiple format (number and name) is
not supported.
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
Description
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
27
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Centrex/PBX Compatibility allows the System to be connected behind centrex or PBX lines.
The System supports up to 6 access codes for dialling centrex or a PBX. These access codes allow the
System, System Message Detail Recording (Call Logging) output to exclude the number dialled to
reach a centrex or PBX line.
When connected behind a PBX or Centrex, Toll Restriction Service (TRS (Call Barring)) can be used
to restrict calls.
The System also supports transmission of a flash signal over the centrex or PBX link.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service
Description
A Class of Service (COS) allows or restricts access to a group of features or functions. For instance,
an Extension COS may allow Call Forwarding features. In the System, both extensions and exchange
lines use classes of service.
The System supports the following COSs for exchange lines and extensions:
•
COS - Exchange Line/Tie
•
COS - Ext/Ext Restriction
•
COS - Extension Feature
•
COS - Exchange Line to Exchange Line Restriction
Class of Service - Exchange Line/Tie
Tie/Exchange Line COS allows or restricts access to various features. Each exchange line is assigned
to one of 16 exchange line classes of service (00-15).
The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each exchange line COS.
Table 4.
28
Exchange Line COS
Number
Feature
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intercom Ringing Tone (Exchange Line or intercom ring tone)
Dial Tone to Tie Lines (Enable/Disable)
Forced Recover on Fast-Busy Tone (Send fast busy or disconnect line)
DDI Dialled Number Conversion Table (DDI/CLI Table A or B)
Paging on DISA/Tie-Line Call (Allow/Restrict)
DISA ID Verification
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction
Ext/Ext Restriction COS allows or restricts calls placed to other extensions based upon the Extension
COS. Each Extension COS is programmed to either originate or not originate calls to another
Extension COS.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Extension Feature
Extension COS allows or restricts access to certain extension features. (The extension features are
described later in this manual.) Each extension is assigned to one of 16 classes of service (00-15).
The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each Extension COS.
Table 5.
Extension COS
Class of Service Features
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ICX-25-700
Feature
Intercom Call Type (Tone/Voice)
Onhook Transfer at Ringback (Allow/Restrict)
Onhook Transfer at Talk (Allow/Restrict)
On-Hook Transfer at Camp-On (Allow/Restrict)
Exclusive Hold for Non-Appearing Exchange Line (System/Exclusive)
Exclusive Hold on SLTs (System/Exclusive)
Brokers Hold on SLTs (3-Party Conference/Brokers)
Hookflash During Talk on SLTs (Allow/Restrict)
SSD Assignment (Allow/Restrict)
SSD Assignment to MCO Tenant Groups (Allow/Restrict)
SSD Dialling (Allow/Restrict)
Intercom Redialing (Allow/Restrict)
Direct Exchange Line Access (Allow/Restrict)
14
MCO Incoming Call Answer (Allow/Restrict)
15
Paging (Allow/Restrict)
16
Auto Repeat Dial (Allow/Restrict)
17
DND Set/Clear (Allow/Restrict)
ICX issued September 1998
29
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Class of Service Features
30
18
DND Set/Clear (Other) (Allow/Restrict)
19
Call Forward/All Calls (Allow/Restrict)
20
Call Forward/No Answer (Allow/Restrict)
21
Call Forward-Busy (Allow/Restrict)
22
Call Forward (Other) (Allow/Restrict)
23
User Maintenance Log-in (Allow/Restrict)
24
Priority Message Waiting Send (VM) (Allow/Restrict)
25
Message Waiting Send (Allow/Restrict)
26
System Mode Switch (Allow/Restrict)
27
Busy Override Send (Allow/Restrict)
28
Manual Camp-On Send (Allow/Restrict)
29
Manual Camp-On Receive (Allow/Restrict)
30
Callback Request Send (Allow/Restrict)
31
Callback Request Receive (Allow/Restrict)
32
Exchange Line Queuing (Allow/Restrict)
33
Manual DND Override Send (Allow/Restrict)
34
Forced DND Override (Allow/Restrict)
35
8-Party Conference (Allow/Restrict)
36
Voice Call Send (Allow/Restrict)
37
Voice Call Receive (Allow/Restrict)
38
Dial Tone Stop (Allow/Restrict)
39
Dial Tone Pre-Pause Check (Check/No check)
40
Long Talk Alarm for Outgoing Exchange Line Calls (Enable/Disable)
41
Recall Timer Apply (Recall to Extension/Recall to Attendant)
42
Forced ARS (Not Forced/Forced)
43
API Event Reporting (No/Yes)
44
Call Forward/Outside (Allow/Deny)
45
Onhook Exchange Line-to-Exchange Line Transfer (Allow/Deny)
46
Station Call Park Answer (Allow/Deny)
47
Station Call Park Transfer (Allow/Deny)
48
OHVA (Allow/Deny)
49
OHVA Answer (Allow/Deny)
50
Call-Waiting Answer at HOLD
51
On-Hook Transfer with Floating Hold
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Exchange Line to Exchange Line Restriction
Exchange Line to Exchange Line COS allows or restricts call transfers from one exchange line to
another exchange line based on the originating and receiving exchange line COS.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CO (Exchange Line) Ringing Types
Description
Several types of Exchange Line ringing are available for the System including the following:
•
•
•
•
Direct Inward Dialling (DDI) Ringing
Direct In Line (DIL) Ringing
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing
Multiple Ringing
These ringing types may be used in any combination in the System.
Direct Inward Dial Ringing
DDI Ringing allows calls on a common Exchange Line to be directed to ring to a specific extension or
group of extensions, etc. based upon the final digits dialled. These final digits are received from the
DDI exchange line and compared to a DDI Table that determines where the calls should ring.
Depending on the assignments in the DDI Table, names or exchange line numbers are displayed.
(Names can be up to 10 digits long.)
DDI Ringing can be very useful by sending calls directly to a specific extension, hunt group, etc.
based upon the number dialled. Since a relatively small number of exchange lines handle the DDI
calls, this can be more cost efficient than DIL exchange lines or attendant group answering and
transfer. (DDI may send a call to a group using the Virtual Extension feature.) DDI Busy/Delayed
Ringing is also available with DDI Ringing. (See “DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on
page 56.)
For more information on DDI Exchange Line Exchange Line Interface, see “CO (Exchange Line)
Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX Model)” on page 33.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
31
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
•
Caller ID takes priority over the DDI name assignment.
Only one of the two DDI tables may have name assignments.
Direct In Line Ringing
DIL Ringing allows calls on a specific Exchange Line to be directed to ring a specific extension,
System Speed Dial (SSD) number (for redirecting calls out), and hunting group.
This can be very useful when a exchange line is dedicated to a specific person or purpose. However,
this can be a more expensive use of the line since it has a more limited use.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Direct Inward System Access Ringing
DISA Ringing (which is related to the DISA feature) allows a Exchange Line specified as a DISA
Exchange Line to ring and give off-site users dial-in access to the System. Once the DISA exchange
line is accessed, the user receives dial tone and may dial an extension.
For more information on DISA, see “Direct Inward System Access” on page 38.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Multiple Ringing
Description
Multiple Ringing allows Exchange Line calls into the System to be directed to ring multiple
extensions in the System. This can be very useful when anyone in a group may answer a call. This can
also be very useful at night when only a selected number of people are available to handle calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CO (Exchange Line) Interface
Description
32
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
The System supports several types of Exchange Line Interfaces including the following:
•
Direct Inward Dialling (DDI)
•
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
•
ISDN - Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
•
Loop Start
Each exchange line type supports various features such as Delayed Ringing, Night Ringing, etc.
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX
Model)
The DDI feature allows an extension to have a dedicated direct number. The dedicated number allows
calls to be made directly to the extension, without the caller going through the attendant.
The DDI number may have from 1 to 4 digits (typically 4).
Each DDI Exchange Line Interface card (VB-44520) supports up to 8 DDI exchange lines.
Hardware Requirements
•
The -48V power supply is required.
Considerations
•
The DDI Exchange Line card supports 1 to 4-digit dial-pulse (10 pps) or Dual Tone
Multifrequency (DTMF) signalling.
•
DDI numbers must be between 0 and 9999.
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - ISDN BRI
The System supports ISDN BRI with the VB-44530 ISDN BRI interface unit. The VB-44530 is a TPoint ISDN-BRI that supports 2 B (bearer) channels and 1 D (data) channel (2B + D; 144kbps or
192kbps). This unit connects to an ISDN Data Service Unit (DSU). Point-to-point and point-to-multi
operations are selectable.
The ISDN-BRI supports enblock setting and enblock setting at the sub-address.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
A DSU is required (not available from Panasonic). Normally the DSU is supplied by the
telephone service provider.
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - ISDN-PRI
The System supports ISDN PRI with the VB-44540 ISDN PRI Interface unit. The VB-44540 is a T/SPoint ISDN Primary Rate Interface that supports 30B (for UK) or 23B (for HK) (bearer) channels and
1 D (data) channel (30B + D; 2M) (23B + D; 1.5M). This unit connects to an ISDN DSU.
Up to 3 units may be installed in a CCU if you use full channel (30B + D)/(23B + D). A maximum of
18 units may be utilised in a fully equipped system. When all 30 or 23 channels on a unit are utilised
in one card, four or three slot positions are required.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
33
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CO (Exchange Line) Interface - Loop Start
The VB-44510 Loop Start interface unit supplies 8 loop start analog exchange lines circuits.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Computer Telephony Integration Capability
Description
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) provides communication and coordination of operation
between computers and the telephone system. A System Telephony Application Programming
Interface (TAPI) module is available to connect extensions to Microsoft windows-based applications.
The TAPI desktop module enables the capabilities of first party call control. With this module there is
a physical connection between your telephone line and PC. Service Provider Interface (SPI) software
must be installed on the PC to enable the capabilities of TAPI on the System for each specially
enabled telephone. Typical desktop applications include Contact Managers, Personal Organizers, and
Personal Answering Machines.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Data Security
Description
If you are using a line for data (modem connections, etc.), Data Security makes it possible to prevent
interruptions. Data Security can be implemented for either all phone use or outside line use.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
34
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
N/A
Day/Night System Mode
Description
Day/Night System Mode enables you to switch the System between two Day modes and a Night
mode. These modes determine incoming call handling, Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring
call handling, and attendant group support.
While in a Night mode (generally used at night or any time when your office is closed), incoming
calls can ring at selected extensions (e.g., a night watchman’s extension or an extension connected to
an answering machine). Outbound calls can be restricted to certain phones. Calls can be directed to a
night-time attendant group instead of the normal daytime attendant group.
The System provides one Night mode for night call handling. However, there are three night feature
access codes (Night, Night 1, and Night 2). These three codes may be used to provide different twoway Voice Mail messages (i.e., Night may select one message, Night 1 may select a different
message, and Night 2 may select a third message.)
Typically, the Day mode is used for normal call processing of outside calls, TRS (Call Barring) calls,
and attendant calls. The second day mode (Day 2) may be used for alternative call handling such as
during a lunch break, etc.
There are two ways to change day/night service modes:
•
Manually
•
Automatically
The following table lists the impact on TRS (Call Barring), Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice
Mail in the various system modes:
Table 6.
System Mode Impact on TRS (Call Barring), Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice Mail
SYSTEM
MODE
TRS (Call Barring)
RING
ATTENDANT
BUILT-IN
VOICE MAIL
Day 1
Day TRS Mode
Day 1 Ring Pattern
Day 1 Attend. Group
Day 1 Message
Day 2
Day TRS Mode
(Same for Day 1 and
Day 2)
Day 2 Ring Pattern
Day 2 Attend. Group
Handling
Day 2 Message
Night
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Message
Night 1
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night 1 Message
Night 2
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night 2 Message
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
35
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Manual Day/Night Mode
You can manually change the System mode to Day 1, Day 2, Night, Night 2, or Night 3 mode by
either entering the correct dial code or by pressing the appropriately programmed FF key.
When using manual mode, the System may be configured to either use MCO tenant Day/Night modes
or system-wide Day/Night mode.
Operation
To switch Day/Day 2/Night modes using Feature Access Codes:
Switch Mode
Toggle Day and
Night Modes
Procedure
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Indication
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 760 (UK/HK) or 760#.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
If changing to Night mode, Red LED lights
If changing to Day mode, Red LED goes off
Day 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 761 (UK/HK) or 761# for
the Day 2 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red LED goes off
Night 1 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 762 (UK/HK) or 762# for
the Night 1 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED goes off
Night 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 763 (UK/HK) or 763# for
the Night 2 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
36
Day and Night modes can be assigned to FF keys on a phone. You can switch between Day 1,
Day 2, Night, Night 1, and Night 2 modes simply by pressing the appropriate key. The FF key
lights red when the System is in the assigned mode. Alternatively a Day/Night toggle mode key
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
can be assigned. Pressing the key toggles between modes. When in Day mode, the FF key LED
is not lit. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.
Automatic Day/Night Mode
You can set the System to automatically enter a particular Day/Night mode determined by the time of
day. Each day of the month can be assigned 1 of 3 automatic system mode patterns. Each of the
patterns can be set to change modes up to 5 times per day.
Up to 20 special days can be programmed with up to 5 automatic mode changes for the day.
An Exception Day period is available for overriding the automatic mode for extended periods of time.
For instance, if an office is shut down for the week of July Fourth, the System can be programmed to
not operate in the automatic mode for those days. The System will stay in the same mode for the
period. The mode may be manually changed at any time.
For instance, the System can be set to automatically enter Day 1 mode at 8:00 a.m. on weekdays and
enter Night mode at 5:00 p.m. on weekdays. All incoming calls, TRS (Call Barring) and attendant
group handling would change accordingly. On Saturday and Sunday, the System would stay in Night
mode.
The Automatic Day/Night modes may be set in User Maintenance. See “Set Mode Schedule” on page
87, “Set Special Day Mode” on page 89, “Set Exception Day Mode” on page 95, and “Set Day of
Week Mode” on page 97.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
You can only set Automatic Day/Night modes on a system-wide basis. If tenant groups require
separate Day/Night modes, you must set these modes manually.
You can manually override Automatic Day/Night modes. (See “Manual Day/Night Mode” on
page 36.)
Digital Pad
Description
Digital pad settings allow adjustment of call levels for different call types. There are 29 pad classes in
the System. For pad class, a volume adjustment is assigned for a connection to any pad class
assignment. The volume adjustment is between -30dB and +30 dB.
There are 8 extension pad classes and 16 exchange line pad classes. In addition, there are pad classes
for conference calls, page port, MFR, RAI Modem, and Conference Call Unit. One pad class is
currently not used.
For instance, a call from an extension assigned to extension pad class 1 to a exchange line assigned to
exchange line pad class 3 would received the volume adjustment assigned to this connection
combination.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
37
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
N/A
Direct Inward System Access
(All Versions)
Description
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) gives off-site users dial-in access to the System. You access
DISA from an outside location by entering a digit number assigned to a DISA exchange line.
For security reasons, sixteen incoming DISA ID codes/TRS (Call Barring) class can be
assigned. If a code is assigned, it must be entered as soon as the DISA exchange line answers.
Operation
To make a DISA call to an extension:
Action
Result
1. From an outside location, enter the DISA exchange line
number.
DISA dial tone
2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code
(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.
3. Dial the extension number.
To make a DISA call to an outside number:
Action
Result
1. From an outside location, enter the DISA exchange line
number.
DISA dial tone
2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code
(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.
3. Enter the exchange line group number (9 or 81-84)
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
• N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
38
Busy override cannot be used for a DISA line.
DISA can be used to access extensions as well as outside numbers.
Paging cannot be accessed from a DISA line.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
While dialling an extension number, the * key may be entered to cancel dialling and return to dial
tone. The # key may be entered to disconnect.
Distinctive Ringing
Description
Distinctive Ringing sets Exchange Line calls to ring with a distinctive ring based on the exchange
line. This “ring” also identifies the call as an outside call instead of an inside call.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Doorphone
Description
The doorphone (also called door phone) allows visitors to announce their presence from the office
door, etc. When the button on the doorphone is pressed, one or more phones ring in the System. When
answered, a two way conversation is made between the doorphone and the answering phone.
The answering party can operate a connected door opener (if equipped).
Operation
To answer a doorphone:
Action
Result
1. Answer the doorphone. (Door box calls ring in on a dedicated FF key.)
Two way conversation possible
2. Enter 3 while connected to the doorphone extension.
Door unlocks
Hardware Requirements
•
•
•
•
The doorphone requires a Doorphone Adaptor, Doorphone, and Door Opener. Door openers are
not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased from an electronics dealer.
Up to 2 Doorphonees can be connected to a Doorphone Adaptor and utilize the same exchange
line.
The Door Opener can be set to open for 15 seconds, 30 seconds, or one minute.
While the Door Opener is functioning, a call from another Doorphone on the same Doorphone
adaptor cannot be answered.
Considerations
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
39
Chapter 3. System Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
The exchange line connected to the Doorphone Adaptor must be set to dial pulse (DP).
Doorphone Sensor
The sensor is a device that detects when a circuit is opened or closed. Sensors can be used to detect
events such as the opening of windows or doors. When the sensor is tripped, a tone sounds at a
designated extension. Sensors are not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased separately
from an electronics dealer.
Hardware Requirements
•
•
The sensor is attached to the Doorphone Adaptor (VB-3473UK).
Exchange Lines connected to the Doorphone Adaptor signal the designated extension when the
sensor is tripped.
Considerations
•
The exchange line connected to the sensor must be a dial-pulse (DP) exchange line.
Extension Interface
The System supports a full array of extension devices including the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Panasonic’s proprietary key telephones
Standard analog devices
Dial Pulse (DP) / Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Single Line Telephone (SLT)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI) S-point devices
ISDN-Primary Rate Interface (PRI) S-point devices
Digital Key Telephones
The System supports the complete line of Panasonic proprietary Digital Key Telephones. These
models include:
U.K.
• 12 key-Standard
VB-D411UK
• 12 key-Speakerphone
40
Others
VB-44220
VB-44221
• 12 key-Display Speakerphone
VB-D411DSUK
VB-44223
• 12 key-Large Display Speakerphone
VB-D411LDSUK
VB-44225
• 12 key-Soft key Display Speakerphone
VB-D411DSVUK
VB-44224
• 24 key-Display
VB-D611DUK
• 24 key-Display Speakerphone
VB-D611DSUK
VB-44233
• EM24-24 key Expansion Module
VB-D331UK
VB-44310
• DSS-72 key DSS/BLF
VB-D631UK
VB-44320
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
UK/Indonesia/Malaysia :In addition to the above digital key telephone module, the System
supports the complete of the DBS proprietary VB-3411/3611 series telephones and
VB-3011 Digital SLT.
HK/Taiwan :The former DBS proprietary telephones are not available to connect to ICX
systems without modification. Please consult to your dealer.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
VB-44220 is not available in Hong Kong.
VB-44221 is not available in Taiwan, Malaysia, and Indonesia.
Analog Device Capability
The System supports analog telephone devices. These devices include fax machines, answering
machines, cordless telephones, computer modems as well as standard rotary and push button
telephones. This provides full flexibility in configuring the System.
Hardware Requirements
•
Analog devices must be connected to an analog port.
Considerations
•
N/A
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
The System supports both DP (rotary dial) and DTMF (push button) analog extension types.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The CPC card provides 4 DTMF receivers. Traffic levels may require that one or more MFR
(DTMF) circuit cards be installed. Each MFR card provides 8 DTMF decoders.
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
The System supports ISDN-BRI terminal devices for connection as extensions. The BRI provides 2 B
(bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (2B +D; 144kbps or 192 kbps).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
UK/Malasia/Indonesia :The System supports Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary
Rate Interface (PRI) terminal equipments with the ISDN/PRI S Point Interface (VB-44540UK).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
41
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
The primary rate interface provides 30B (bearer) plus one D (data) channel support (30B +D;
1984kbps).
Either 8 or 30 circuits may be enabled on the interface. Each enabled group of 8 circuits requires
a slot position in the System. Fully used cards occupy four slot positions.
HK/Taiwan :The System supports ISDN-PRI terminal equipments with the ISDN/PRI S Point
Interface (VB-44540). The PRI provides 23 B (bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (23B + D;
1544 kbps).
Either 8 or 24 circuits may be enabled on the interface. Each enabled group of 8 circuits requires
a slot position in the System. Fully used cards occupy 3 slot positions.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Flexible Numbering Plan
Description
The System provides flexible numbering for feature access special numbers and extension numbers.
The dialling plan allows settings for digits dialled at dial tone, digits dialled at ringback tone, digits
dialled at busy tone, two patterns of feature codes dialled at dial tone, two patterns of feature codes
dialled at ringback tone, and two patterns of feature codes dialled at busy tone.
Feature access codes can be used when replacing another PBX system with a ICX system. Rather than
learning the new access codes, the System feature access codes can be changed to match the old
system. As a result, telephone users are less confused by the change and the requirement for retraining
is reduced. Two sets of feature access codes are available (one of the two must be assigned to the
terminal).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Flexible Slot
Description
Each CCU in the System contains 12 flexible (universal) slots. These slots can be used for exchange
line cards, extension cards, or certain option cards.
Some circuit cards such as the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Primary Rate Interface
(PRI) card occupy more that one slot.
42
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Hunting Groups
Description
Hunting allows calls to be automatically transferred among a preselected group of phones. If a phone
is busy or there is no answer in a set amount of time, the call will hunt to the next phone in the hunt
group.
A phone assigned to a hunt group is called a member. Up to 20 members can be assigned to a hunt
group. Up to 12 hunt groups are available per CCU.
Several methods of station hunting are available. Some methods require use of a pilot number (a
fictitious extension number) while others start by a direct call to a hunt group member.
The System supports the following hunting groups:
•
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group
•
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group
•
Switch Back Hunt Group
•
Circular Hunt Group
•
Next Extension/Hunt Group
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System begins with the first member
and hunts through the group for the first available member to receive the call. If no member is
available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued
for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer to specify how long the
System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that the same hunting order is taken for all calls. This is
useful in presenting calls to selected members first.
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System reviews who received the
last call and begins hunting with the next member. If the last member in the group is reached and no
member is available, the hunt continues with the first member and proceeds forward. After a complete
search and no available member is found (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified
amount of time), the call is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the
Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before
beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls are evenly distributed throughout the group.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
43
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Switch Back Hunt Group
Switch Back Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension
in the group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the
end of the group. If no member is available, the system hunts backward from the called member. If no
member is available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call
is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify
how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt
group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion
of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.
Circular Hunt Group
Circular Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension in the
group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the end of
the group and then moves forward from the first member of the group. If no member is available
(extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued for the first
member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the
System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion
of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.
Next Extension/Hunt Group
Next Extension/Hunt Group lets you specify which extension or hunt group to search after the
Queuing Timer expires. This hunt group can be set as any type of hunt group, an attendant group, or
an extension (including virtual extensions).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
44
If a member of the hunt group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that
phone is temporarily removed from the hunt group.
If a member of the hunt group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the call
goes to the next phone in the hunt group.
If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to
another hunt group or another extension.
A hunt group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several phones
can be made to ring at the same time.
The pilot number for a hunt group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated as the
pilot [not a real extension]).
Hunt groups support the following call types:
• CLI (Called Line Identification) / Direct Dial Inward (DDI)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Extension calls
• Private network attendant calls
• Call forward incoming
• Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Internal Hold Tone
Description
If a Music-on-Hold (MOH) sound source is unavailable, a periodic hold tone generated internally in
the System can be provided to a caller. For more information, see “Music-on-Hold” on page 46.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Tenant Group
Description
When the System is configured for tenant operation, MCO Tenant Group determines which exchange
line groups are used for incoming and outgoing calls.
Each MCO exchange line group is assigned to an MCO tenant group for incoming calls and for
outgoing calls. By default, Exchange Line Group 1 is assigned to MCO Tenant Group 1, Exchange
Line Group 2 is assigned to MCO Tenant Group 2, etc. for both incoming and outgoing calls.
For outgoing calls, each tenant group has 5 auto-exchange line selections available. By default the
first auto-exchange line selection is seized by entering 9, the second by entering 81, etc.
The number of MCO tenant groups available depends on the number of ports in the system as follows:
•
96-port system: ....1 to 12 MCO tenant groups
•
192-port system: ...1 to 24 MCO tenant groups
•
288-port system: ...1 to 36 MCO tenant groups
•
384-port system: ...1 to 48 MCO tenant groups
•
480-port system: ...1 to 60 MCO tenant groups
•
576-port system: ...1 to 72 MCO tenant groups
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
When you first assign an exchange line to an Exchange Line Tenant Group from the initial
setting of (0), the system automatically assigns the exchange lines as a member of the same
number MCO Exchange Line Group (FF5-2 and FF5-3). For instance, if Exchange Line 10 is
assigned as a member of Exchange Line Tenant Group 1, then Exchange Line 10 is automatically
assigned as a member of MCO Outbound Exchange Line Group 1 and MCO Inbound Exchange
Line Group 1. These assignments can be manually changed if desired.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
45
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Memory Backup
Description
Data stored in the CPC card can be copied to another CPC card in the OP2 card slot for the first CCU.
This is particularly useful when performed after completion of initial system setup (as a recovery
measure) or before major changes are made to system configuration. This backup CPC can then be
used to immediately restore system operation.
This feature is a maintenance feature to be performed by the System certified dealer only.
Hardware Requirements
•
A second CPC card that matches the type installed must be used to copy the memory.
Considerations
•
N/A
Music-on-Hold
Description
The System can provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) to parties on hold (either Exchange Line, extension,
or network party). The MOH feature can also be used to play announcements or advertisements if
desired.
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Considerations
•
Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers,
Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit
radio or recorded music through the MOH feature. Panasonic , its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license.
Name Assignments
Description
Names may be assigned to the following:
•
•
•
•
46
Extensions
Exchange Lines
DDIs
Personal Speed Dials
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
Systems Speed Dials
Exchange Line names and DDI names must be assigned in dealer programming mode. Extension
names and Speed Dial names may be assigned from a display telephone.
This feature does not require the use of a DSS/72 console or entering the programming mode.
Extension Name Assignments
Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length. (Assignment of extension names must be
allowed in the Extension COS.)
Operation
To set extension names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 2 for the Extension Name Assignment mode.
EXT
NO.=>
EXT
NAME displays
5. Enter the extension number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
XXX
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
7. Press the FL/R key to clear the existing data.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
8. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
48.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 49.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 48.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 49.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 7-8 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired extension name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next extension number displays
12. To enter another extension name, press the CONF key and
repeat steps 5-11.
EXT
NO.=>
EXT
NAME displays
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
47
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Example 1. Large-display phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
48
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Example 2. Small-display phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.)
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
-
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
49
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length.
The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a Class of
Service (COS) that allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User
Maintenance” of this document.)
Speed Dial Name Assignments
You can assign names to Personal Speed Dial (PSD) numbers from a display telephone without
entering the programming mode. If allowed in the Extension COS, you can also assign names to
System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers.
Operation
PSD Names:
To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.
50
ICX issued September 1998
A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =
PSD bin 80)
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Action
Result
5. Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD
bin number.
A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX
= desired PSD bin number)
6. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
48.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 49.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data
7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 48.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 49.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired PSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
9. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next PSD bin number displays
10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.
SSD Names:
To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
-SSDXXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
7. Press the FL/R key to clear the current data.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
51
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
8. Enter the speed dial name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
48.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 49.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 48.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 49.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next SSD bin number displays
12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key and
repeat steps 5-11.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16
characters.
•
The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a Class of
Service (COS) that allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User
Maintenance” of this document.)
Network Facilities
Description
The System supports networking facilities such as:
•
Networking extension calling
•
Network paging
•
Network call transfer
•
Tandem calling
For more information on System Networking, see the System Networking Reference Manual.
52
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Network Call Transfer
Network Call Transfer allows a call at an extension to be transferred to another extension in the
network.
Network Extension Calling
Network Extension Calling allows you to reach an extension on another PBX. Based on the number
you dial, the System network routes the call automatically.
Network Paging
Network Paging allows users on one System to page on another System when the appropriate Class of
Service (COS) allows.
Network Call Routing
Network Call Routing allows multiple systems that are interconnected in a network, to direct calls to a
specific tie line based on the number dialled. The call does not leave the network.
Tandem Connection
Tandem Connection allows calls that are received over the network tie lines to be automatically routed
on to another PBX or out to the public network.
Hardware Requirements
•
T1 (USA), E&M (HK) or AC-15 (UK) Card
Considerations
•
N/A
Non-Blocking Architecture
Description
The System is totally non-blocking. All extension and outside lines are available for use at the same
time.
Hardware Requirements
•
The CPC96 supports up to 96 ports. The CPC288 supports up to 288 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW576.
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
53
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Power Failure Transfer
Description
Power Failure Transfer provides telephone service to a limited number of Single Line Telephones
(SLTs) during a power failure. The SLTs are connected to the Exchange Line via a Power Failure Unit
(PFU). In the event of a power failure, the power failure extensions have dial tone directly from the
Exchange Line. (System features and restrictions do not apply.)
Hardware Requirements
•
Power Failure Unit
•
An SLT that will be connected to the PFU.
Considerations
•
Up to four SLTs can be connected to one PFU.
•
For added protection against power outages, backup batteries can be installed in the System.
Backup batteries provide full telephone service and system features to all System extensions for
a limited amount of time. With maximum traffic, the backup batteries last up to 30 minutes.
Power On Maintenance
Description
The System allows you to change most circuit cards, programming, and many other maintenance
features while the System is powered on and operating. Very few operations require the System to be
powered down or out of service. The System therefore continues to operate without interruption for
most maintenance functions.
A limited number of items such as the replacement of some common control circuit cards requires the
system to be powered down.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Programming Devices
Description
The dealer may program the System either by using:
54
•
A digital key telephone equipped with display
•
A PC-Based Customizing Tool
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Telephone Programming
The System can be fully programmed from an extension telephone equipped with 12 FF keys and a
display. While major system configuration changes may be more easily performed using a PC
programmer, all programming is available via a telephone. This is especially useful for minor changes
to the system configuration.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
PC-Based Customizing Tool
The System can be completely configured using the PC-Based Customizing Tool. This may be done
either by directly connecting to the System or by remote connection using a modem.
The System database can be uploaded and downloaded for easy storage and retrieval.
The PC-Based Customizing Tool connects to the System through the RS232C maintenance port.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Ringing Modes
Description
The System supports multiple types of Exchange Line ringing including the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day 1/Day 2/Night Ringing
Day 1/Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
DDI Day/Night Ringing
DDI Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
Busy Lamp Field Immediate Ringing
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
Slide Ringing
Alarm Ringing
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing
When the System is in Day 1 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Day 1 ringing assignments.
When the System is in Day 2 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Day 2 ringing assignments.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
55
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
When the system is in Night mode, call can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Night ringing assignments.
Inbound calls can be directed to desired normal daytime locations by setting the system into a Day
mode. By having a second day mode (Day 2) alternative call handling is available during day
operation. For instance, during lunch, calls can be directed to an alternative position.
Calls can be directed specific night locations when the system is set to Night mode.
For more information on Day Ringing, see “Day/Night System Mode” on page 35.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing causes an incoming outside call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a
certain period of time, to ring at a designated extension or extensions. Delayed ringing destinations
can be set for Day1, Day 2 and Night modes. Exchange Line Delayed Ringing is also available for
hunt group pilot numbers.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing
(Note: Analog DID is not available in the UK, TX or EX model).
Incoming DDI calls can be set to ring at day destinations when the system is in day mode and ring at
night destinations when the system is in night mode.
Hardware Requirements
•
DDI (DID) Trunk Card
Considerations
•
N/A
DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
DDI Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing causes an incoming DDI call to a busy primary extension to
ring at a designated extension or extensions. DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing also causes an incoming
DDI call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a certain period of time, to ring at a
designated extension or extensions. Separate ring destinations are available for day and night modes.
DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group pilot numbers. However, when the
Queuing Timer expires, the call leaves the hunt group and is forwarded to the DDI Busy/Delayed
Ringing destination.
56
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Call Forwarding takes priority over DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing
•
If the call is part of a hunt group and the Queuing Timer expires, the call is forwarded to the DDI
Busy/Delay Ringing destination. (See “DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on page
56.)
Busy Lamp Field Ringing
Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to ring on those
keys.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.
•
For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 156.
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to delay ring on
those keys.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.
•
For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 156.
Slide Ringing
Similar to Delayed Ringing, Slide Ringing allows an alternate position to answer calls. If a call is not
answered within a slide ringing time period, the call can be set to ring at another phone with that
exchange line key.
One possible use for Slide Ringing is in an office with a common secretary. A non-ringing FF key can
be assigned for each exchange line used by the group. If a call is not answered within the slide ringing
timer, the call will ring the common secretary.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
57
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Alarm Ringing
Alarm Ringing allows the incoming ringing tone to be changed if the call is not answered in a
predetermined time. This can be very useful in alerting others to pick up unanswered calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If slide ringing is enabled, it will override alarm ringing.
SSD TRS (Call Barring) Override
Description
System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers may be used to outdial calls from extensions that otherwise have
outgoing call restrictions (i.e., Toll Restriction Service [TRS]).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging) provides detailed call records of outgoing calls.
Call Logging records can be output to a printer or an external call accounting system.
Various types of information are reported on the Call Logging record and each type of information
occupies a set position in the Call Logging format (See Figure 1 on page 59.) One type of information
is the “condition code” which occupies the first position in the output format. This code specifies what
type of call was made or received (e.g., DISA Incoming call [S] or Outgoing Network call [W]).
However, condition codes are prioritized, and the type of call determines what code is displayed.
The following tables shows the priority of condition codes for outgoing calls and incoming calls.
Table 7.
Priority of outgoing call condition codes
Priority
58
Condition
Code
Description
Highest
T or H
2nd
F
T = Outgoing Transfer Call
H = Outgoing Hold Call
F = Call Forward Outside Call
3rd
W
W = Network Outgoing Call
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Condition
Code
Priority
Description
4th
L
L = LCR Outgoing Call
Lowest
O
O = Outgoing Call
For example, an outgoing call is an ARS Outgoing call (G) but it is also a transferred call. The Call
Logging data condition code will be T to indicate that the call was an Outgoing Transfer. (A
transferred call’s condition code takes precedence over the type of call - ARS Outgoing call [G].)
Table 8.
Priority of incoming call condition codes
Condition
Code
Priority
Highest
h or t
2nd
D, N, or S
Lowest
I
Description
h = Incoming Hold
t = Incoming Transfer
D = DDI Incoming Call
N = Network Incoming Call
S = DISA Incoming Call
I = Incoming Call
For example, an incoming call is a DDI Incoming call (D), but it is also a transferred call. The Call
Logging data condition code will be t to indicate that the call was an Incoming Transfer call. (A
transferred call’s condition code takes precedence over the type of call - DDI Incoming call [D].)
Figure 1.
Output data format
H
H
1
Condition Code: (I: Incoming call / D: DDI incoming call / h: Hold incoming call / N:
Network incoming call / S:DISA incoming call / t: Transfer incoming call /
O: Outgoing call [Non LCR] / F: Call forward outside call / G: ARS outgoing call / H: Hold
outgoing call / L: LCR outgoing call / s: DISA outgoing call / T: Transfer outgoing call / W:
Network outgoing call)
2
Call start time (MM=01 to 12 / DD=01 to 31 / HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)
3
Call duration time (HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)
4
Exchange Line user No. (extension line No.: 0 to 9999 / Exchange Line No.: C1 to C576)
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
59
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
5
Exchange Line No. (Exchange Line No.: 1 to 576 / When Exchange Line is disconnected
while the call is on hold: *1 to *576)
6
Dialled No. (24 digits max. including 0-9, *, # Cannot display Flash or Pause. If a number is
hidden, * will appear instead of digits. * will stay with the call even if the call is transferred.
For Format 2, an I Proceeds the digits if it is an incoming call.)
7
Accounting code (10 digits max.)
8
Verified Account code (Verified Account code table number V001 to V500)
9
Caller data (Format #2 only)
10
ISDN charge data (Format #2 only - originator number applies to ISDN only)
H
Carriage return line feed
Hardware Requirements
•
A printer or external call accounting system is required to receive Call Logging data.
Considerations
•
A call must be answered to generate Call Logging data (e.g., answered by Voicemail, call pickup,
etc.)
You can specify which type of Call Logging data format is sent (i.e., either Format 1 or 2).
•
Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring)
Description
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring allows access levels, including the prohibition of long
distance calls or after-hours calls, to be assigned to specific extensions or Exchange Lines. This
minimizes non-business related calls and reduces phone bills by only allowing long distance calls
over designated lines.
TRS (Call Barring) can be used in conjunction with Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
•
•
•
•
•
•
TRS classes are set on an extension and exchange line basis. Up to 50 TRS (Call Barring)
classes can be assigned.
Each TRS class is then assigned to a TRS level. This level is used as the basis for allowing or
restricting calls.
There are 10 TRS levels available: 0 denies all calls, 1-8 may be partially restrictive per
assignments, and 9 allows all calls.
TRS can restrict the number of digits dialled (1 to 20 digits limit or no limit).
TRS can restrict the use of System Speed Dials (SSDs) for out dealing on a TRS class basis;
either no system speed dials or limit the range of SSDs.
TRS can restrict the use of the star (*) or pound (#) digits on a TRS class basis.
The following calling restrictions are also available:
•
60
Forced ARS Restriction (The ARS feature controls outside calls.)
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The dialling restrictions included in this feature help prevent unauthorized outgoing calls. It is
possible; however, to program your System to allow SSD to override TRS.
For more information on ARS/TRS (Call Barring), see“ARS and TRS (Call Barring) Operation”
on page 267.
•
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access Groups
Description
Exchange Lines can be placed in exchange line groups. When a exchange line group is accessed, the
System automatically selects an open exchange line from the group.
Operation
To access an exchange line group:
Action
Result
1. Enter the exchange line access code (default exchange line
group access codes are 9 or 81-84).
2. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Exchange Lines can only appear in one exchange line group.
If Automatic Call Routing is enabled, the MCO access code (9 by default) automatically
accesses the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) features.
Virtual Port
Description
Virtual ports are not physical ports in the System. They are phantom or simulated ports used in the
System to support:
•
•
Virtual extension ringing
Virtual floating hold
Up to 96 virtual ports may be assigned per CCU.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
61
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension
You can assign an actual extension number to a virtual port. You can then assign the extension number
as any actual extension (incoming call settings and types, Station Class of Service (COS), tenant
group, pickup group, etc.). You can also assign the virtual port to an FF key on one or more telephones
and set to ring. Any call directed to the virtual port extension number will ring the assigned
telephone(s).
Virtual extensions provide a mechanism for ringing multiple phones simultaneously. For instance, a
Direct Inward Dialling (DDI) entry can only be set to ring to one extension number. However, if the
DDI is set to ring a virtual extension and the virtual extension is assigned to ring keys on multiple
extensions, the DDI will ring the multiple extensions.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold
You can assign a virtual port that is not assigned an extension number to be used for floating
hold. The virtual port is assigned to an FF key. Calls can then be placed on hold on the virtual
port FF key. Any extension that is assigned the same virtual port FF key can then pick up the
held call.
This can be used like a system park feature.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
Description
The System supports third party Voice Mail systems with features such as:
•
•
•
•
•
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
CLI/DDI ID Code for Voice Mail
High Priority Message Waiting
Message Key ID Code
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
Description
62
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
This feature allows the ICX to send an answer signal to third-party Voice Mail systems.
Without this feature a third-party Voice Mail cannot receive a signal indicating that a DBS
ICX extension has answered. In other words, to determine that the extension has answered,
the Voice Mail system would have to wait until the extension stops receiving ringback tone.
As a result, waiting for the ringback to stop often delays connection times for calls from
Voice Mail to extensions. By sending an answer signal, this feature provides quicker response
time between the ICX and the Voice Mail system.
Hardware Requirements
•
AEC Port
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
The digits used for the answer signal code are determined by the requirements of the Voice Mail
system.
The answer code may be up to 4 characters and consist of the characters 0 - 9, *, #, and pause.
If the called extension does not answer and is forwarded to Voice Mail, the ICX sends a Call
Forward ID code back to the Voice Mail system.
During transmission of the answer signal code, other DTMF digits and functions from the ICX
extension are ignored.
The Voice Mail port must be assigned as a Voice Mail port connection.
The DTMF pattern is set as pattern 2.
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail allows you to call forward to a third-party Voice Mail system.
The ID Code sends the digits that are required by the Voice Mail to identify the System extension.
Operation
To set a Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail:
Action
Result
1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715 (UK/HK) or
715#).
Enter V.M. ID displays
3. Enter the ID code required by voice mail (see your voice
mail manual). Usually this is the extension number.
4. Press the HOLD key.
Stored V.M. ID displays
5. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
63
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
To clear the ID Code:
Action
Result
1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715 (UK/HK) or
715#)
Enter V.M. ID displays
3. Press the HOLD key.
Cleared V.M. ID displays
4. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code
CLI/DDI calls may be sent directly to voice mail through the used of the DDI Voice Mail ID Code. A
prefix and suffix may be specified to be sent to the voice mail as well as a chosen number of DDI
digits.
Either no digits (default), the last two digits of the DDI, the last three digits of the DDI or the entire
DDI number may be sent.
The prefix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).
The suffix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
Each pause is a fixed 1 second delay.
If you do not assign a Voice Mail ID Code, the DDI digits will be sent to voice mail.
Only one Voice Mail ID Code is available for the system.
High Priority Message Waiting
Message waiting displays and LEDs may be utilized by the Voice Mail system to indicate that a Voice
Mail message has been left in your mail box. When you retrieve the message, the message waiting
indications are cleared.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
64
For more information on setting and retrieving message waiting, see the telephone operation
sections that follow in this document.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Message Key ID Code
On a large-display phone you can use a Message key (labelled MSG) to either retrieve Voice Mail
messages or respond to telephone messages. When responding to Voice Mail messages from a 3rd
party Voice Mail system, the Message key needs to have an ID code set to identify the caller to the
Voice Mail system. You can also use the Message key to program a Voice Mail password.
You must program the Message key using the User Maintenance feature “Set Message Key ID Code”
on page 86.
Operation
To retrieve a message at Voice Mail:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG key.
Voice mail instructions
2. Follow the Voice Mail instructions for retrieving messages.
3. When finished retrieving messages, replace the handset or
press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Voice Mail Transfer Key
Description
The Voice Mail Transfer (VM/TRF) key allows you to transfer calls to voice mailboxes without
waiting for voice mail to answer. You can assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone or through
system programming.
Two Voice Mail Transfer keys are available. VM Transfer Key 1 will transfer to a voice mail
extension number. Voice Mail Transfer Key 2 will transfer to the voice mail pilot number.
Operation
To assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FF key to be assigned as the Voice Mail Transfer
key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
65
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Press REDIAL and 74nnnn (VM Transfer Key 1) where
nnnn is the voice mail extension number
or
Press REDIAL and 75nnnn (VM Transfer Key 2) where
nnnn is the voice mail extension number
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To use a Voice Mail Transfer key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key to answer the
incoming call.
Connected to caller
2. Press the VM/TRF (1 or 2) key .
System places caller on hold
3. Press the DSS/BLF key, dial an extension number or select
the extension from the extension directory on the large display telephone.
4. Replace the handset or press the RELEASE, ON/OFF, or
PROG key.
Once a call is sent to the voice mail, after the voice mail answers, the system sends the VM Transfer
ID 1 or 2 + the extension number (BLF/DSS, Directory or dialled number).
Hardware RequirementsN/A
• N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
66
The VM/TRF key can be assigned to any key phone, DSS/72 or EM/24. The VM/TRF key
cannot be assigned to a one-touch key.
The VM/TRF key can be used to transfer intercom as well as Exchange Line calls to a voice
mailbox.
The Voice Mail Transfer ID codes are assigned in the Maintenance Programming section. Up to
ten digits can be stored.
The system responds to key operations during the transfer in the following ways:
• Pressing the FL/R key cancels the VM/TRF and returns intercom dial tone to the user.
When the VM/TRF is cancelled, the incoming call is still connected but is on hold.
• If a valid key (Exchange Line key or second DSS key, for example) is pressed, the
VM/TRF is cancelled and the operation invoked by the key is performed.
• If an invalid key (REDIAL, for example) is pressed, the VM/TRF is cancelled, and the
user receives busy tone.
• Once VM/TRF is pressed, the user can dial up to 10 digits before completing the transfer.
If a user begins to perform the voice mail transfer and the extension cannot hold a call (one call is
already on non-appearance hold, for example), the system will keep the call in the talk state and
will not allow the voice mail transfer to be initiated.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
If the VM/TRF key stores a number other than a voice mail extension number, the system does
not send DSS/BLF information or the extension number that is dialled after pressing VM/TRF.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
67
Chapter 3. System Features
68
Section 700 - Operation
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System maintenance topics and features:
Topic
Page
Introduction
70
About User Programming
70
Set System Date/Time/Day
71
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
72
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
73
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
78
Set System Speed Dial Names
79
Set System Speed Dial Index
80
Set Extension Names
82
Set Verified Account Codes
83
Set Call-Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
85
Set Message Key ID Code
86
Set Mode Schedule
87
Set Special Day Mode
89
Set Exception Day Mode
95
Set Day of Week Mode
97
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes
99
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
100
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
101
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
102
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
69
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Introduction
User Maintenance provides several items that can be adjusted by the end user of the telephone system.
The telephone system dealer is not required to make these changes. These items include settings for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date and Time - including date, time, and day of week
Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Assignment - including PSD number and name
System Speed Dial (SSD) Assignment - including SSD number and name
Extension name
Verified Account code
Call Forward ID code
Message Key ID code
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Code
TRF of CFID
CID Logging Ext
System mode. You can set the System to handle incoming calls, outbound call routing, and
built-in voice mail call messages differently depending upon whether the system is in Day
mode, Day 2 mode, or Night mode. With User Maintenance, you can program the System for
mode schedule, mode schedule for special day, mode schedule for exception days, and day of
the month patterns.
About User Programming
User Maintenance requires a Digital Display Key Telephone assigned to a Class of Service (COS) that
allows User Maintenance.
The procedures in the following sections describe the basic steps used for modifying parameters.
However, there are many alternative ways to view and modify the parameters using special keys and
procedures. Some of the more advanced keys include:
REDIAL
(At menu level) clears an entry
(At data entry) retrieves the last entry setting
(At menu level) ignored
(At data entry) clears setting
Begins programming log-in or exits programming
(At menu level) moves toward data entry level within the same address
(At data entry) saves the displayed setting and moves to the next setting
Moves to the main menu
Moves to the first data setting
FL/R
ON/OFF
HOLD
PROG
CONF
MEMORY
MENU
PREV
Backs out of the address menu levels
NEXT
)
)
VOLUME (
VOLUME (
FF1
FF2
FF3
FF4
FF5
FF6
FF7
LINE
70
Ignored
(At menu level) moves to the previous screen
(At data entry) ignored
(At menu level) moves to the next screen
(At data entry) ignored
Scrolls through the same address level (ascending)
Scrolls through the same address level (descending)
Date and Time
Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Assignment menu
System Speed Dial (SSD) Assignment menu
Extension Name menu
Verified ID Code menu
Call Forward ID Code menu
Message Key ID Code menu
System Mode menu
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Note: Once in a data entry level, you must either enter an acceptable value or restore the previous
value before proceeding. For instance, if you change an entry to an unacceptable value and then press
FF2 to move to the PSD Assignment menu, you will not be able to proceed. You must first enter an
acceptable value.
Operation
To enter User Maintenance mode:
Action
Result
1. At a telephone with a COS that allows user login, press the
ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key twice (* *).
81-
4. Press the CONF key.
User MAINT displays
Note: Your extension’s Class of Service must be properly set to allow User Maintenance access.
Also, only one user may enter User Maintenance or System Programming at a time.
Set System Date/Time/Day
Description
The System allows you to change the date, time, and day of week. When setting the time, you can
specify 12 or 24 hour format.
Operation
To change the system date, time, and day of week:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 000.
0
:YYMMDD
Date displays
3. Press the HOLD key.
4. Enter the year (two characters), month (two characters), and
day (two characters).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
1
:HHMM
Time displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
71
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
6. Enter the hour (two characters) and minute (two characters).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
7. Press the HOLD key.
2
:
Day of the Week displays
8. Enter the day of week where:
1 = Mon, 2 = Tues., 3 = Wed., 4 = Thurs., 5 = Fri., 6 = Sat.,
0 = Sun.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
10. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
Description
For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 171 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 231 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“Personal Speed Dial” on page 273 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set PSD numbers:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 01.
72
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
3. Press the HOLD key.
8101PSD Assignment displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
0
:
PSD Number displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
EXT Number displays
6. Dial the extension number.
7. Press the HOLD key.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = dialled extension number)
8. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
9. Press the HOLD key.
YYY
ZZ displays (where XXX
= extension number, YYY = assigned
name, and ZZ = PSD bin number)
10. Enter the PSD digits to be dialled.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next PSD bin number displays
12. To set additional PSD numbers, press the volume up and
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
PSD bin number.
Desired PSD bin number displays
13. Repeat steps 10-12 until all PSD numbers are entered.
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
Description
For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 171 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 231 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“Personal Speed Dial” on page 273 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
73
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set PSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 01.
8101-
3. Press the HOLD key.
PSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 1.
1
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
PSD Name displays
EXT Number displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Dial the extension number.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = dialled extension number)
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
A B C D E F PXX displays (where
PXX = PSD number)
10. Press the HOLD key.
11. Enter the PSD name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
75.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 76.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
12. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 75.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 76.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
13. Repeat steps 11-12 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired speed dial name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
14. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next PSD bin number displays
15. To set additional PSD names, press the volume up and
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
PSD.
Desired PSD bin number displays
16. Repeat steps 11-15 until all PSD names are entered.
74
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
17. Press the MEMORY key to exit the PSD name entry
mode.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
18. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
81-
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Example 1. Large-display phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
75
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Example 2. Small-display phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press.
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
76
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
77
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 174 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 233 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 274 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set SSD numbers:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8102SSD Assignment displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
0
:
SSD Number displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
Enter SSD # displays
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
7. Press the HOLD key.
-SSDXXX
XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
8. Enter the SSD digits to be dialled.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear an entry or any existing
data.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD bin number displays
10. To set additional SSD numbers, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
SSD.
Desired SSD bin number displays
11. Repeat steps 8-10 until all SSDs are entered.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
78
N/A
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Names
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 174 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 233 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 274 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set SSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8102SSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 1.
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
SSD Name displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
Enter SSD # displays
1
7. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
8. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
9. Enter the SSD name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
75.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 76.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 75.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 76.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
79
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD bin number displays
13. To set additional SSD names, press the volume up or down
key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD.
Desired SSD bin number displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD names are entered.
15. Press the MEMORYMEMORY key to exit the entry
mode.
Enter SSD # displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Index
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 174 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 233 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 274 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set SSD index using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8102SSD Assignment displays
80
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
4. Enter 2.
5. Press the HOLD key.
2
:
SSD Index displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
Enter Index # displays
7. Enter the SSD Index number (1 - 2).
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Enter the SSD Index name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
75.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 76.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 75.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 76.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD index number displays
13. To set additional SSD index names, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
SSD.
Desired SSD index number displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD indexes are entered.
15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
Enter SSD # displays
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
81
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
•
Section 700 - Operation
N/A
Set Extension Names
Description
You can assign names to each extension, even if the extension is not a display telephone. When the
extension is called, the name appears on the display. For more information on the digital key
telephone display, see “Display Information” on page 140.
Operation
To set extension names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 03.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8103Extension Name displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
0
:
EXT Number/Name displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
Enter EXT # displays
6. Dial the extension number.
7. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
8. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
75.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 76.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 75.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 76.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired speed dial name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
82
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
12. To set additional extension names, press the volume up and
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
SSD.
13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all extension names are entered.
14. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
Enter EXT # displays
15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Verified Account Codes
Description
(For a description of Verified Account Codes, see “Verified Account Codes” on page 110.)
You can enter up to 500 Verified Account codes. The System will store them in memory as valid
codes. Once the codes are entered here, a Toll Restriction Service (TRS (Call Barring)) Class of
Service (COS) can be used with each code. You can then enter your code on someone else’s phone to
bypass the TRS (Call Barring) restrictions on that phone. (The TRS (Call Barring) assigned to the
Verified Account code will override the phone’s TRS.)
Operation
To set the Verified Account code:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 04.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8104Verified ACCD displays
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
83
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
Table Number displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Enter the Verified Account table number (001-500).
XXX-
6. Press the HOLD key.
Verified ACCD displays (where XXX =
account code table number)
0001 : AAAAAAAAAAA
7. Press the HOLD key.
XXX:Account Cod displays (where
AAAAAAAAAAA = current account
code and XXX = account code table
number)
8. Enter up to ten-digit Verified Account Code. (All Verified
Account Codes must be unique. If there is a matching entry
entered, the System will not accept the entry and will double
beep.)
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
0002 :X
9. Press the HOLD key.
XXX:TRS Class displays (where X =
TRS Class)
10. Enter the TRS (Call Barring) Class to be associated with
the Verified Account Code entry.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
0001 :YYY displays (where YYY = the
next account code table number)
12. To add additional Verified Account numbers, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired Verified Account table number.
Desired Verified Account table number
displays
13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all Verified Account numbers are
entered.
14. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode
Table Number
15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
84
N/A
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Set Call-Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
Description
(For a description of Call Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, see “Call Forward ID Code for Voice
Mail” on page 63.)
Voice Mail Call-Forward ID codes are used by voice mail systems to identify the correct mail box for
storing messages. The actual entry needed will vary by voice mail systems and configuration. Often
the entry is the extension number.
Operation
To set the Call Forward ID code:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 05.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8105C.FWD ID Code displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
CF ID-EXT Numbe displays
5. Dial the extension number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
CF-ID EXT XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
7. Enter the Call Forward ID code.
Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain
0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).
To clear an entry or any existing data, press the FL/R key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional Call Forward ID codes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired extension.
Desired extension displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Call Forward ID codes are set.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
CF ID-EXT Numbe displays
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
85
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
•
Section 700 - Operation
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Message Key ID Code
Description
(For a description of the Message Key ID Code Feature, see “Message Key ID Code” on page 65.)
On a large display phone you can use a Message key to either retrieve voice mail messages or respond
to telephone messages. To respond to voice mail messages from a 3rd party voice mail system, you
need to set the Message Key ID code to identify the caller to the voice mail system. You can also use
the Message key to program a voice mail password.
Operation
To set the Message Key ID code:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 06.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8106MSG Key ID Code displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
MSGID-EXT Numbe displays
5. Dial the extension number of the phone being programmed.
6. Press the HOLD key.
MSG-ID EXT XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
7. Enter the Message Key ID code.
Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain
0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).
To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional Message Key ID codes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired extension.
Desired extension number displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Message Key ID codes are set.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
MSGID - EXT Numbe displays
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
81-
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
86
User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Mode Schedule
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
37.)
You can set the System to automatically enter None, Day 1, Day2, Night, Night (1), or Night (2)
modes based upon mode patterns. You can define up to 3 patterns with up to 5 modes for each day.
(This menu allows the setting of the patterns.)
Operation
To set the Mode Schedule:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8107System Mode displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
0Mode Schedule displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
000
:HHMM
PTN 1-1 Start T displays
6. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes
(two characters) for the Pattern 1 - first mode.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
7. Press the HOLD key.
001
:
PTN 1-1 Mode displays
8. Enter the desired mode for Pattern 1 - first (0 - None, 1 Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night (1), 5 - Night (2)).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
87
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next pattern mode displays
10. To set additional mode schedules, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
Desired pattern mode displays
11. Repeat steps 6-10 until all patterns and modes are set.
(There are 3 total patterns with 5 start time/modes each.)
Note: Entry Positions are listed in Table 9 on page 88.
12. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
0Mode Schedule displays
81-
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
Table 9.
Mode Schedule Patterns - addresses & values
8107-0 (00-29) Hold
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (00-29) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
88
ON/OFF LED goes off
1st MODE
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Start Time
(HHMM)
00
02
04
06
08
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
01
03
05
07
09
Start Time
(HHMM)
10
12
14
16
18
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
11
13
15
17
19
Start Time
(HHMM)
20
22
24
26
28
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
21
23
25
27
29
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Special Day Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
37.)
You can specify up to 20 special days for the System. For each special day, you can specify up to 5
modes settings.
Operation
To set the Special Day Modes:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8107System Mode displays
4. Enter 1.
5. Press the HOLD key.
1Mode Special Day displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
1000
:MMDD
Special Day 01 displays
7. Enter the date by month (two characters) and day (two characters) for the Special Day 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
8. Press the HOLD key.
1001
:HHMM
S Day 01-1 Start displays
9. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes
(two characters) for mode 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
89
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
1002
10. Press the HOLD key.
:
S Day 01-1 Mode displays
11. Enter the desired mode for Special Day ( (0 - None, 1 Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night(1), 5 - Night (2)).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
12. Press the HOLD key.
Next Special Day mode displays
13. To set additional Special Day modes, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
14. Repeat steps 7-13 until all Special Day modes are set. (Up
to 20 special days may be entered.)
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 10.
15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
1Mode Special Day displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Table 10.
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Special Day Start Time/Mode - addresses & values
8107-1 (1000-1219) Hold
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- VALUES --
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
MODES
1st MODE
Special Day 1
90
81-
OR...
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1000
Start Time
(HHMM)
1001
1003
1005
1007
1009
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1002
1004
1006
1008
1010
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
8107-1 (1000-1219) Hold
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 2
Special Day 3
Special Day 4
Special Day 5
ICX-25-700
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1011
Start Time
(HHMM)
1012
1014
1016
1018
1020
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1013
1015
1017
1019
1021
Date
(MMDD)
1022
Start Time
(HHMM)
1023
1025
1027
1029
1031
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1024
1026
1028
1030
1032
Date
(MMDD)
1033
Start Time
(HHMM)
1034
1036
1038
1040
1042
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1035
1037
1039
1041
1043
Date
(MMDD)
1044
Start Time
(HHMM)
1045
1047
1049
1051
1053
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1046
1048
1050
1052
1054
ICX issued September 1998
91
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
8107-1 (1000-1219) Hold
Section 700 - Operation
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 6
Special Day 7
Special Day 8
Special Day 9
92
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1055
Start Time
(HHMM)
1056
1058
1060
1062
1064
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1057
1059
1061
1063
1065
Date
(MMDD)
1066
Start Time
(HHMM)
1067
1069
1071
1073
1075
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1068
1070
1072
1074
1076
Date
(MMDD)
1077
Start Time
(HHMM)
1078
1080
1082
1084
1086
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1079
1081
1083
1085
1087
Date
(MMDD)
1088
Start Time
(HHMM)
1089
1091
1093
1095
1097
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1090
1092
1094
1096
1098
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
8107-1 (1000-1219) Hold
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 10
Special Day 11
Special Day 12
Special Day 13
ICX-25-700
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1099
Start Time
(HHMM)
1100
1102
1104
1106
1108
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1101
1103
1105
1107
1109
Date
(MMDD)
1110
Start Time
(HHMM)
1111
1113
1115
1117
1119
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1112
1114
1116
1118
1120
Date
(MMDD)
1121
Start Time
(HHMM)
1122
1124
1126
1128
1130
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1123
1125
1127
1129
1131
Date
(MMDD)
1132
Start Time
(HHMM)
1133
1135
1137
1139
1141
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1134
1136
1138
1140
1142
ICX issued September 1998
93
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
8107-1 (1000-1219) Hold
Section 700 - Operation
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 14
Special Day 15
Special Day 16
Special Day 17
94
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1143
Start Time
(HHMM)
1144
1146
1148
1150
1152
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1145
1147
1149
1151
1153
Date
(MMDD)
1154
Start Time
(HHMM)
1155
1157
1159
1161
1163
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1156
1158
1162
1162
1164
Date
(MMDD)
1165
Start Time
(HHMM)
1166
1168
1170
1172
1174
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1167
1169
1171
1173
1175
Date
(MMDD)
1176
Start Time
(HHMM)
1177
1179
1181
1183
1185
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1178
1180
1182
1184
1186
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
8107-1 (1000-1219) Hold
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 18
Special Day 19
Special Day 20
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1187
Start Time
(HHMM)
1188
1190
1192
1194
1196
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1189
1191
1193
1195
1197
Date
(MMDD)
1198
Start Time
(HHMM)
1199
1201
1203
1205
1207
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1200
1202
1204
1206
1208
Date
(MMDD)
1209
Start Time
(HHMM)
1210
1212
1214
1216
1218
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1211
1213
1215
1217
1219
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Exception Day Mode
Description
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
95
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
37.)
You can specify exception days which allow for a range of days for the System to operate in the Night
mode. This is intended for extended holidays for business shut down periods that last for multiple
days. You can specify up to 6 exception day periods.
Operation
To set the Exception Day Modes:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
8107-
3. Press the HOLD key.
System Mode displays
4. Enter 2.
2-
5. Press the HOLD key.
Mode Except Day displays
200
6. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
PTN 1 Start Day displays
7. Enter the start date by month (two characters) and day (two
characters) for Exception Period 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
201
8. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
PTN 1 Stop Day displays
9. Enter the stop date by month (two characters) and day (two
characters) for Exception Period 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
10. Press the HOLD key.
Next Exception Day mode displays
11. To set additional Exception Day modes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired mode.
Desired Exception Day mode displays
12. Repeat steps 7-11 until all Exception Day modes are set.
(Up to 6 exception periods may be specified.)
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 11 on page 97.
96
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
13. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
2Mode Except Day displays
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
Table 11.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Exception Days
8107-2
(200-211)
EXCEPTION DAYS:
200=Start - Exception Day 1
201=End - “
202=Start - Exception Day 2
203=End - “
204=Start - Exception Day 3
205=End - “
206=Start - Exception Day 4
207=End - “
208=Start - Exception Day 5
209=End - “
210=Start - Exception Day 6
211=End - “
“
Hold
(MMDD)
Hold
Month/Day of Exception Days
(Start or End)
“
“
“
“
“
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Day of Week Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
37.)
The System allows you to specify up to 3 mode patterns. This menu item determines which pattern to
follow for a given week day in the month (i.e., first Monday, second Monday, etc.).
Some bushiness may have special operating hours based on the day of the month. For instance, a
company may work half-days on the second Saturday of each month.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
97
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set the Day of Week Modes:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
8107-
3. Press the HOLD key.
System Mode displays
4. Enter 3.
3-
5. Press the HOLD key.
D of Week PTN displays
300
6. Press the HOLD key.
:
1st SUN Pattern displays
7. Enter pattern (0 - no pattern, 1 - pattern 1, 2 - pattern 2, 3 pattern 3) for the first Sunday.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next Day of Week mode displays
9. To set additional Day of Week modes, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
Desired Day of Week mode displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until the remaining days in the month are
set.
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 12 on page 98.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
3D of Week PTN displays
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
Table 12.
ON/OFF LED goes off
Day of the Month - addresses
ADDRESSES
FOR THESE
DAYS OF THE
WEEK:
98
81User MAINT displays
OR...
-- DAY OCCURRENCE -(e.g., 1st Sunday=address 300; 2nd Sunday=address 307)
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Sunday
300
307
314
321
328
Monday
301
308
315
322
329
Tuesday
302
309
316
323
330
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
ADDRESSES
FOR THESE
DAYS OF THE
WEEK:
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Wednesday
303
310
317
324
331
Thursday
304
311
318
325
332
Friday
305
312
319
326
333
Saturday
306
313
320
327
334
-- DAY OCCURRENCE -(e.g., 1st Sunday=address 300; 2nd Sunday=address 307)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes
Description
You can assign Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes for each extension.
Operation
To set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes using either a large-display or small-display
phone:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 08.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8108Walking TRS Cod displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
Walking ID-Ext displays
5. Dial the extension number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
Walking ID XXX displays
7. Enter the 4-digit Walking TRS Code.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
Next extension number displays
99
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
9. To set additional extension WalkingTRS Codes, press the
volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move
to the desired Extension.
10. Repeat steps 8-10 until all extension are entered.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
Description
You can assign a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically used
for forwarding calls to voice mail.
Operation
To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or smalldisplay phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 09.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8109TRF of CFWD displays
4. Enter 0.
5. Press the HOLD key.
CFWD-Busy EXT # displays
6. Dial the extension number.
100
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
7. Press the HOLD key.
Enter CODE displays
8. Enter the destination extension.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
10. To set Call Forward Busy destinations for additional extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the
HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.
11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.
12. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
Description
You can assign a Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically
used for forwarding calls to voice mail.
Operation
To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or smalldisplay phone:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 09.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8109TRF of CFWD displays
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
101
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Enter 1.
5. Press the HOLD key.
CFWD-NoANS Ext displays
6. Dial the extension number.
7. Press the HOLD key.
Enter CODE displays
8. Enter the destination extension.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
10. To set Call Forward No Answer destinations for additional
extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the
HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.
11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.
12. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
Description
You can assign Caller ID Call Logging to extensions. The system is limited to 20 call logging
extensions per cabinet as follows:1
102
Number of Cabinets
Total Number of
Call Log Extensions
1
20
2
40
3
60
4
80
5
100
6
120
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
.
Operation
To set a Caller ID Logging Extensions using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 71.)
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 10.
8110-
3. Press the HOLD key.
CID Logging EXT displays
CID Logging # displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Enter log control number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Dial the extension number.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next log control # displays
9. To set CID Log for additional extensions, press the volume
up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired Extension.
10. Repeat steps 6-8 until all extension are entered.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
103
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
104
Section 700 - Operation
DBS 576 (USA), Revised 6/11/98
576-13-700
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
This chapter describes Key telephone features. Key telephones are proprietary digital phones that
provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Key Telephone
108
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes
108
Attendant Group Calls
109
110
111
Auto Repeat Dial
112
Background Music
112
Busy Override
113
Callback Request
114
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb
115
Call Hold
System Hold
Floating Hold
Exclusive Hold
Broker’s Hold
Call Park
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
Unsupervised Transfer
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
116
116
117
118
119
119
121
121
122
123
125
125
126
127
127
128
Caller ID Call Log
128
129
130
131
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
136
Conference Calls
Three-Party Conferencing
Eight-Party Conferencing
137
ICX-25-700
138
138
ICX issued September 1998
105
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
Page
140
Display Information
Large Display Phone
Small Display Phone
Changing the Display Contrast
Do-Not-Disturb
140
141
142
142
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
143
DSS/72 Console
144
EM/24 Console
145
Flash
145
Flexible Function Keys
146
Handsfree Answerback
151
Handsfree Operation
152
Headset Operation
153
Hot Dial Pad
153
Hot Line
154
Intercom Calling
155
Last Number Redial
156
Line Appearances
DSS/BLF Appearances
Direct In Line Appearances
Multi-Exchange Line (MCO) Appearances
156
Message Key
156
158
158
160
Message Waiting / Callback
160
Mute Function
162
Offhook Monitor
163
Offhook Signalling
163
Offhook Voice Announce
164
One-Touch Keys
166
Onhook Dialling
168
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
169
Reset Call
169
170
Ringing Line Preference
171
Speed Dialling
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignments
171
171
174
176
177
183
Timed Reminder Call
106
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Topic
Page
184
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Exchange Line Key Access
Direct Exchange Line Access
MCO Line Preference
MCO Exchange Line Access
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
184
186
186
186
187
Variable Mode
188
Voice Recognition
190
Volume Control
191
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
192
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
107
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone
As an example of a key telephone, Figure 2 illustrates the Panasonic model VB-44225/VBD411LDSUK. This model provides a large display that includes one-touch access to speed dial
numbers, telephone features, and Help screens.
Figure 2.
Large display key telephone
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System
Message Detail Recording (Call Logging) record.
In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS (Call Barring) level to allow calls
to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
108
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
This feature works with Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging). During a phone call, a
station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code. The entered Code will display on
the phone’s LCD as it’s dialled, so the user can tell it’s being registered. Then later, the Call Logging
reports will show the Code dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes you can use in the ICX:
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity; the user can enter anything from 1-10
digits long. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced Account Codes (the user must
enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can enter a code, but doesn’t have
to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls,
the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code
before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a code that has been preprogrammed into
an Account Code Table. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program these
codes with their own Toll Restriction Service (TRS (Call Barring)) Class assignment so that, when
entered, they will override the extension’s TRS Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float”
from phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an
account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.
To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
Enter Account # displays
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
Specified account code displays
4. Press the # key.
Entered Account # displays
5. Press a vacant Exchange Line key or enter an exchange line
access code.
Exchange Line Key LED lights
6. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
109
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To enter an account code during an outside call:
Action
Result
1. During a call, press the MEMORY key.
2. Press the # key.
Enter Account # displays
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
Specified account code displays
4. Press the # key.
Display returns to call state.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call
Barring can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that
changes the TRS (Call Barring). After a call is made, the Call Logging record for the call will show
the verified account code.
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
Enter Account# displays
3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits max.).
Account Code entry displays
4. Press the # key.
Entered Account# displays
5. Press a vacant Exchange Line key or enter an exchange line
access code.
Exchange Line Key LED lights
6. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
An Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code
records.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Forced Account Code
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Forced Account
•
FF3: Verified Account
•
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS Class
Considerations
110
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
•
Account codes will be cancelled after using Exchange Line queuing.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS (Call Barring) Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Non-Verified
Verified
Account Code Based TRS
Class
TRS (Call Barring) Class
for Forced Account Code
(FF1 0 19 0001)
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 (UK/HK) or 9
(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)).
Call Attendant displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension Number
•
FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups
Considerations
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
•
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
•
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
111
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Auto Repeat Dial
Description
If you press the FL/R key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically
redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number
answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.
Operation
To use Auto Repeat Dial:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press a vacant Exchange Line key or enter an exchange line
access code
Exchange Line Key LED lights
3. Dial the phone number.
• Dialled phone number displays
• Busy tone
System automatically redials number
4. Press the FL/R key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Auto Repeat Dial)
•
FF3: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Background Music
Description
If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle
telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the
phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.
The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source. If MOH is
provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For more information on
MOH, see page 46.)
112
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To turn Background Music on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
BGM ON displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To turn Background Music off:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
BGM OFF displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors,
and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded
music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment
fail to obtain such a license.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To break into a call with a line appearance on your phone (Exchange Line Key Busy
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
113
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Override):
Action
Result
1. Press the lit direct Exchange Line key.
• Alert tone sounds to both phones (System programming required)
• Connected to both parties
To use Extension Busy Override:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
Intercom dial tone
• Dialled extension number displays
• Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 (UK/HK) or 9#).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(System programming required)
• Connection to both parties
• OVR1: (name of overriding extension) and OVR2: (extension name for
current talk path) displays on both
extensions
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
FF3: Data Security
Considerations
•
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will
be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that
extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
114
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Dialled extension number displays
• Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 (UK/HK) or
3#).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
To respond to a callback request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
System automatically redials extension
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice
Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
•
Call Forwarding - Busy
•
Call Forwarding - No Answer
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
115
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721#.
• For another extension, enter 741 (UK/HK) or 741#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For information, see “Speed Dialling” on page 171.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731#.
• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
Operation
116
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722#.
• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For information, see “Speed Dialling” on page 171.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732#.
• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
Operation
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
117
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723#.
• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For information, see “Speed Dialling” on page 171.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733#.
• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your
own extension in one step.
Operation
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls and DND:.
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF-All/DND Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
118
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward All/Busy/No-Answer/DND Cancel)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.
(For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
•
If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a
System Speed Dial (SSD) code.
•
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
•
You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call
Forwarding - Busy are set. Cancelling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other
modes will remain set until cancelled individually.
•
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
•
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
•
You can cancel both Call Forwarding-All Calls and DND by entering 7 * *.
Call Hold
Description
The System provides the following types of Call Hold or Call Park:
•
System Hold
•
Floating Hold
•
Exclusive Hold
•
Broker’s Hold
•
Station Call Park
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
Operation
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
119
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from the extension that placed it there:
Action
Result
1. Press the line key that is flashing green or press the HOLD
key if a non-appearing Exchange Line call.
CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside
line number)
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from an extension other than the one that put
it there:
Action
Result
1. Press the line key that is flashing red.
CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside
line number)
To retrieve a held call on a specific exchange line:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Exchange Line Answer code (default =
*0).
Enter TRK # displays
3. Enter the exchange line number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold on HOLD Key
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
120
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Floating Hold
Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension that
has an FF key assigned to the same Floating Hold orbit where the call is held. You can also retrieve a
call by dialling the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.
Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can
be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged
party can then pick up the call by dialling the orbit number or by pressing an FF key assigned to that
orbit number.
Note: To place a call on Floating Hold, you should have at least one FF key assigned to a Floating
Hold orbit number (001-576).
Operation
To place a call on Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the Floating FF key (system programming required) or press the HOLD key.
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. (A) Press the FF key assigned to the Floating Hold orbit
number where the call is held.
OR...
CO XXX displays if line released (where
XXX = outside line number)
(A) Enter the Floating Hold Answer feature access code
(default = *9).
(B) Enter the Floating Hold orbit number (001-576) for the
held call.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold on HOLD Key
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF4: FF-Key Feature Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
121
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold Exchange Line calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the Exchange Line key used for the
call or press the HOLD key.
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. Press the Exchange Line key on which the call is held.
• Exchange Line LED stops flashing,
remains green
• CO XXX displays if call released
(where XXX = outside line number)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-01: Exclusive Hold (Exchange Line Key)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation - System vs. Exclusive)
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the
HOLD key.
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Press the HOLD key.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Press the HOLD key.
122
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: Broker’s Hold
Considerations
•
In order to use Broker’s Hold with Exchange Line calls, the first call must have a possible
appearance and non-appearance, but in the case of appearance, the first call must be one of
Exchange Line key.
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
Exchange Line, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX. One way is to park the call at the
receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer
code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial
the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call.
Operation
To park a call on this extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
• Current call on hold
• CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX =
exchange line number)
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default 771 (UK/HK)
or 771#) or press PARK HOLD key.
Park Hold displays
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default
773 (UK/HK) or 773#).
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where
XX = line number)
• Connected to parked call
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
123
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To park a call at another extension:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
• Current call on hold
• CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX =
exchange line number)
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default 774 (UK/
HK) or 774#)
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.
Park (ext#) displays on lower display
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default 772 (UK/
HK) or 772#).
• CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where
XX = line number)
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
Considerations
124
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
•
Call Park functions can be assigned to FF keys (see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 146).
•
No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.
•
A Call Park Answer key may not be assigned to the EM/24 or DSS/72 console.
•
If a call is parked by Call Park key, the LED flashes.
•
LCD softkeys are also available for Call Park.
•
Once a call is parked, it cannot be accessed by the Exchange Line key or direct Exchange Line
access (similar to exclusive hold).
•
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Exchange Line Group Pickup
•
Exchange Line Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701 (UK/HK) or 701#).
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702 (UK/HK) or 702#).
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
125
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 (UK/
HK) or 703#).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-6: Call Pickup Group Assignment
Considerations
•
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration
The Call Pickup Group assignments determine the order calls are picked up (i.e. if two calls are
ringing in the call pickup group, the call ringing the first member will be picked up first).
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of
the ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704
(UK/HK) or 704#).
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
126
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your
own MCO incoming exchange line group.
Operation
To use Exchange Line Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Exchange Line Group Pickup code (default = 709
(UK/HK) or 709#).
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-3: MCO-Inbound Exchange Line Group
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific exchange line
number.
Operation
To use Exchange Line Direct Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Exchange Line Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
127
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system)
exchange line.
Outside number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
Calls in Exclusive Hold cannot be picked up.
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
Talk-EXT Name or Number displays
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key if using DSS/72).
128
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Seize an exchange line line and dial the number to which the
call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
Talk-EXT XXX displays (where XXX =
extension)
4. Complete the transfer:
Original call LED light turns red
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer, the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key if using DSS/72).
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press a vacant Exchange Line key or enter an exchange line
access code.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
129
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-on activated,
enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 (UK/
HK) or 2#).
Camp-on tone heard at the called extension
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Exchange Line-to-Exchange Line On-hook Transfer Restriction)
Considerations
130
•
If On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS),
he/she must press the PROG or RELEASE key before hanging up to complete the transfer.
•
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy
extension.
To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the exchange line-toexchange line on-hook transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the
second call but the second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is
busy, the transferred party will receive busy.
Caller ID Call Log
Description
(Note: Analog Caller ID is not available in the UK, TX, or EX model).
The Call Log keeps a record of Caller ID calls to individual phones. The Call Log allows you to view
Caller ID calls that have been sent to your phone and, if desired, return a call.
The following table shows maximum number of extensions that may have call logs and the number of
entries.
Table 12-1. Call log maximums
Call Log Maximums
Maximum
Maximum number of extensions with Call Log
20 per CCU
Number of log entries that can be stored for an extension. (After the call
log fills with 10 entries, each additional entry overwrites the oldest log
entry.)
10
The Call Log stores information for Caller ID calls that ring a phone. If the phone does not ring (for
instance when Call Forward - All Calls is active), there is no entry in the Call Log for that call.
Each Call Log entry includes the following call information:
•
•
•
•
Calling number
Time and date
Whether the call was answered
How the call was routed.
The most recent entries are stored first in the Call Log.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
131
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone
Operation
To view the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press On/Off.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing On/Off.
Example Caller ID Call Log (Small Display Telephone):
Call Result
08:30 Fri Oct 24
(blank) - Answered
- Calling Party
Hung Up
- Answered by
Someone Else
Time and Date of Call
Calling Number
01:2015553678
Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)
To outdial from the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press On/Off.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log)
Press the left EXEC key to access Access MCO 1 (dial
“9”), dial add digits (usually “1”), and dial the displayed caller ID number
or
Press the right EXEC key to access Access MCO 1
(dial “9”), and dial the caller ID number
132
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press On/Off.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:
Press PROG, the speed dial bin number (80 - 99) and
press the left EXEC key (to dial the add digits, usually
an area code) and press HOLD
or
Press PROG, the speed dial bin number (80 - 99) and
press the right EXEC key and press HOLD
Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone
Operation
To view the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press On/Off.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing On/Off.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
133
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Example Caller ID Call Log (Large Display Telephone):
Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)
Call Result
08:30 Fri Oct 24
(blank) - Answered
- Calling Party
Hung Up
01:2015553678
- Answered by
Someone Else
Time and Date
of Call
Calling Number
01:2015553678
02:2015554444
03:2015553456
04:4045554321
05:4045557654
To outdial from the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press On/Off.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log)
Press the Soft key to the left of the desired number to
access Access MCO 1 (dial “9”), dial add digits (usually “1”), and dial the displayed caller ID #
or
Press the Soft key to the right of the desired number to
access MCO 1 (dial “9”), and dial the caller ID #
To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:
Action
134
Result
1. Go off-hook or press On/Off.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:
Press PROG, the speed dial bin number (80 - 99) and
press the left Soft key (to dial the add digits, usually an
area code) and HOLD
or
Press PROG, the speed dial bin number (80 - 99) and
press the right Soft key and press HOLD
Hardware Requirements
•
•
•
Caller ID daughter circuit card on the Loop Start Exchange Line Card if a Loop Start Exchange
Line receives the call.
ISDN (PRI-T Point) if ISDN card receives the call.
Large Display Telephone or 44-Series Small Display Telephone.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
135
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1 0 01 0020 Caller ID Log Outgoing
FF1 0 01 0021 Caller ID Log Control for Private or Out of Area
FF8 1 10 Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
Considerations
•
•
•
Caller ID is available ISDN PRI.
Caller ID circuit card must be installed and enabled. (See “Caller ID” on page 27).
Caller ID is typically 10 digits. If the local calling area requires 7-digit dialling, the call log
outdialling will not operate properly.
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the
first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to
the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
Operation
To use Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Wait XXX displays (where XXX =
extension number/name)
• Called party hears alert tone from the
speaker.
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To use Manual Camp-on:
Action
136
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 (UK/
HK) or 2#).
• Wait XXX displays (where XXX =
extension number/name)
• Called party hears alert tone from the
speaker
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.
OR....
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
Press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Receive)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
FF3-0: Auto Camp-on
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “To camp a call onto a
busy extension:” on page 130.
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
optional Conference Card is installed, up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call.
The System supports the following types of Conference Calls:
•
•
ICX-25-700
Three-Party Conferencing
Eight-Party Conferencing
ICX issued September 1998
137
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Three-Party Conferencing
The System supports the following types of three-party conference calls:
•
3 extensions
•
2 extensions and 1 Exchange Line
•
1 extension and 2 Exchange Lines
Operation
To establish a 3-party conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your
current call.
Extension number, outside line number,
or name of held party displays
2. Press a vacant Exchange Line key, enter an exchange line
access code, or dial the number of the extension you wish to
add to the call.
• Outside dial tone (if exchange line
access code entered)
3. If you pressed an unlit line key in step 2, dial the number of
the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise, proceed to
step 4.
Dialled number displays
4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
CNF1:CO XXX or EXT XXX and
CNF2:CO YYY or EXT YYY displays
(where XXX = first party and YYY = second party)
• CO #XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
5. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.
6. To release a conference member, press PROG + 1 to release
conference member 1 or press PROG + 2 to release conference member 2. Note: The conference member numbers are
shown on the display.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-1: System Timers (Exchange Line to Exchange Line)
Considerations
•
N/A
Eight-Party Conferencing
With the optional Conference Card installed, up to 8 parties can be included in a conference call.
However, only one of the parties can be an Exchange Line (i.e., 8 extensions or 7 extensions and 1
Exchange Line).
138
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To establish an eight-party conference call from the idle status:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Eight-Party Conference code (default = 788 (UK/
HK) or 788#). Go to step 4.
3. Press the HOLD key.
4. Dial the number of the extension you wish to add to the call.
Note: One outside party can be included.
5. If you accessed an outside line in step 4, dial the number of
the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise, proceed to
step 6.
Dialled number displays
6. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
Connected to the called party.
7. To add additional parties to the call, repeat steps 3-6.
To establish an eight-party conference call from your current call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your
current call.
Extension number, outside line number,
or name of held party displays
2. Enter the Eight-Party Conference code (default = 788 (UK/
HK) or 788#).
3. Press the HOLD key.
4. Dial the number of the extension you wish to add to the call.
Note: One outside party can be included.
5. If you accessed an outside line in step 4, dial the number of
the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise, proceed to
step 6.
Dialled number displays
6. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
Connected to called party
7. To add additional parties to the call, repeat steps 3-6.
Hardware Requirements
•
Conference Card.
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (8-Party Conference)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to use Eight-Party
Conferencing.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
139
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
If the originating party hangs up, the conference call will be disconnected. If any other party
hangs up, the conference call will remain in progress.
Display Information
Description
Key telephones with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) reflect the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day and time (in 12 or 24 hour format)
Callback requests from other extensions
Extension number
Extension calling party name
Extension called party status
Exchange Line call duration
Exchange Line number
Exchange Line name
Display telephones can also display Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Directories, System Speed Dial (SSD)
Directories, and Extension Directories, along with various other information such as the Set/Cancel
status of different features and callback messages from other extensions.
Examples of large and small-display phones are shown in the following illustrations.
Large Display Phone
Figure 3.
Large Display Main Menu (shown in default idle condition)
You can easily access and use many telephone features by pressing the soft key next to the desired
Main Menu item. These items include:
Personal Dial
Contains PSD numbers. To scroll through the PSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV buttons
located beneath the display.
•
140
PSD speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial
directory. For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page
171.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
System Dial
Contains SSD numbers. To scroll through the SSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV button
located beneath the display.
•
SSD numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory. For
information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page 171.
Extension
Contains the Extension Directory (grouped alphabetically). To scroll through the Extension Directory,
press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.
Function System
Provides easy access to most key telephone features, such as Call Forwarding, Do-Not-Disturb
(DND), Microphone Mute, Background Music, Call Pickup, Account Codes, Message Waiting /
Callback, Headset On/Off, Extension Port confirmation, etc.
To scroll through the list of items, press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.
Function Ext
Allows you to assign frequently used telephone features for easy access. Most items found under
Function System can be assigned to the Function Ext area, in any order you desire. (For additional
information, see Section 400 - Programming.)
Large-LCD Display During Idle
The large display telephone may optionally be set to return to a selected idle screen after the user goes
on-hook. If the Large-LCD Display During Idle setting (FF3 0 BSSC 04 11 HOLD) is set to 1 (allow),
after moving to the desired menu is displayed, the user may enter ON/OFF PROG ## ON/OFF to
select the menu as the idle menu.
Small Display Phone
Figure 4.
Small Display Menu (shown in default idle condition)
The Mode key and End key on a small-display phone allow you to change the software mode of the
display from Default (i.e., time and date) mode to Directory mode. While in Directory mode, you can
view SSD and PSD Directories and Extension Directories. You can dial a speed dial number or
extension by pressing the soft key next to the desired number. You can also use the soft keys to
execute programmed system features while in the Variable mode.
Notes:
•
•
•
The MODE key allows you to switch the display from Default to Directory mode. The END
key allows you to return the display to Default mode.
The soft keys allow you to view speed dial and extension directories and to dial a speed dial
number or extension while in the Directory mode.
Speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory.
For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page 171.
Variable Mode
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
141
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys to access programmed features while your phone is in
the following states:
•
During an intercom call
•
During Exchange Line dial tone
•
During a exchange line call
•
After dialling a busy extension
Note: Variable Mode features required system programming.
Changing the Display Contrast
You can adjust the display contrast by pressing the # + VOLUME (▲ or ▼) key while the phone is
idle.
Do-Not-Disturb
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 (UK/HK) or
720#).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 (UK/HK) or
720#).
• DND/CD LED light goes off
• DND Cleared displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
142
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To set DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740
(UK/HK) or 740#).
Enter DND EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number.
DND Set displays on affected extension
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750
(UK/HK) or 750#).
Enter DND EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number.
DND Cleared displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Forced DND override is available.
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
Description
Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from
DP to DTMF signalling when using a DP exchange line. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail
system using a DP exchange line, you can switch to DTMF signalling to communicate with the Voice
Mail system.
The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing timers.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
143
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To switch from DP to DTMF dialling:
Action
Result
1. Press the * key or the # key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: DTMF
•
FF2: DP to DTMF (Outgoing)
•
FF2: DP to DTMF (Incoming)
Considerations
•
N/A
DSS/72 Console
Description
The DSS/72 console is a 72-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 72 keys on the
DSS/72 can be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.
In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs)
that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned
extension is busy, and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.
For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 146.
Hardware Requirements
•
DSS/72 console
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
144
•
Pressing a DSS key while connected to an outside line places the line on hold.
•
A maximum of 12 DSS/72 consoles can be connected to a 96-port system.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
EM/24 Console
Description
The EM/24 is a 24-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 24 keys on the EM/24 can
be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.
In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs)
that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned
extension is busy and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.
For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 146.
Hardware Requirements
•
EM/24 console
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Flash
Description
You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically
reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FL/R or PROG
key.
Exchange Line programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to
extension dial tone status.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-1: Flash Timer
•
FF2: Flash Pattern
•
FF2: Flash Key Operation
•
FF3: Flash on PROG (Recall)
Considerations
•
You can send a longer or shorter flash signal, depending on whether you use the FL/R or PROG
key (flash tone lengths are set for the FL/R and PROG keys through system programming).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
145
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Flexible Function Keys
Description
You can assign frequently used functions to programmable keys on key phones, DSS/72 consoles, and
EM/24 consoles. All keys not already assigned as line or speed dialling keys are available for
programming.
You can store either Fixed Feature codes or Flexible Feature codes in an FF key. (The LED of the
Flexible Function [FF] key will not light when digits are stored in the key.) Fixed Feature codes are
hard-coded and cannot be changed. Most features; however, can also be assigned flexible codes
according to the System Dial Plan. This allows the flexible codes to be changed in the dial plan
without having to re-program extensions.
When a flexible code is programmed into an FF key or soft key, the System translates the flexible
code into the fixed code. You can use either the Fixed Feature code or your System’s Flexible Feature
code when programming FF keys. Table 13 on page 148 reflects both Fixed Feature codes and the
System defaults for Flexible Feature codes.
Operation
To assign Fixed Feature codes to an FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
F displays
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
Enter Function# displays
4. Press the FL/R key.
5. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 13 on page
148.)
Programmed code displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
Programmed function name displays
7. Repeat steps 2-6 to program additional keys.
8. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign Flexible Feature Codes to an FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
F displays
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
Enter Function# displays
4. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 13 on page
148.)
Programmed code displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
Programmed function name displays
6. Repeat steps 2-5 to program additional keys.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
146
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To erase a code stored on an FF key:
Note: You cannot use the following procedure to clear FF keys that have been assigned as Exchange
Lines. Exchange Line keys can only be cleared through system programming.
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FF key that was programmed.
Programmed code displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
Cleared Function displays
To check a programmed FF key (Display Phone Only):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the FF key to be checked.
Programmed data displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension Numbers
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
•
•
•
If a new code is programmed into a key, the previously programmed code is erased.
FF keys assigned as Exchange Lines must be cleared using system programming before new FF
assignments can be made.
The System can be programmed so that MCO 1 Exchange Line Access calls automatically use
Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
The ANSWER key functions as listed in the table below.
Status
Condition
Operation when ANSWER key is pressed
Idle
No incoming ring
Ignore.
Incoming ring
Monitor ON (speaker) - Auto Answer for incoming ring.
Off-hook signaling
Answer for off-hook signaling. Current conversation will be
put on hold automatically.
No off-hook signaling
Ignore.
Off-Hook
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
147
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Status
Section 700 - Operation
Condition
Operation when ANSWER key is pressed
NOTE: When the extension has 1 non-appearing Exchange Line on hold and 1 non-appearing Exchange Line at
talk, ANSWER key operation is ignored and you can’t put the 2nd non-appearing Exchange Line on hold.
•
The RELEASE key functions as listed in the table below.
Status
Condition
Operation when RELEASE key is pressed
Idle
--
Ignore.
Monitor ON (speaker)
or Headset Mode
Several held calls
Latest held call will be transferred; phone returns to idle status (Monitor OFF).
No held calls
Current call (talk) will be released; phone returns to idle status (Monitor OFF).
Several held calls
Latest held call will be transferred; phone gets internal dial
tone.
No held calls
Current call (talk) will be released; phone gets internal dial
tone.
Handset Off-Hook
Table 13. Feature access codes for FF key assignments
148
Feature Description
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
Exchange Line Key
# + (Exchange Line 1-576)
MCO Key
1 + (Auto-Select Pattern 1-5;
MCO-Incoming Trk Grp 00-99)
Virtual Port Key
∗9 + (Virtual Port 001-576)
BLF/DSS Outgoing
9 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF/DSS Immediate Ring
81 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF Delayed Ring
82 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF/DSS-No Ring
83+ (Extension 0-9999)
2-Way Box for CCU 1
61 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 2
62 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 3
63 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 4
64 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 5
65 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 6
66 + (box no.)
2-Way Retrieve Messages
5 + (box no.)
2-Way Access
∗#50
2-Way End
∗#51
2-Way Re-Record
∗#52
2-Way Pause
∗#53
2-Way Store
∗#54
ICX issued September 1998
Default Flexible Feature Code
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Feature Description
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
2-Way Add
∗#55
2-Way Cancel
∗#56
2-Way Notify
∗#57
2-Way Copy
∗#58
2-Way MF Send
∗#59
ACD-1 Log-In/Out Button
∗#80
ACD-1 Work Unit
∗#81 + (Work Unit 00-99)
ACD-1 Unavailable Button
∗#82
ACD-2 Log-In/Out Button
∗#85
ACD-2 Work Unit
∗#86 + (Work Unit 00-99)
ACD-2 Unavailable Button
∗#87
Speed-Dial Send Button
∗01 + (SSD or PSD)
80
Designated Exchange Line Access
Button (for outgoing calls)
∗02
88
Verified ID Code Send
∗03
89
Floating Hold Answer
∗04
∗9
Priority Message-Waiting: Send
∗05
∗41
Priority Message-Waiting: Cancel
∗06
∗49
Message-Waiting: Cancel
∗07
∗5
Message-Waiting: Callback
∗08
∗6
Call Forward (All): Set
70 + (Extension 0-9999)
721 (UK/HK) or 721# +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (All): Clear
∗09
731 (UK/HK) or 731# +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (All): Set from
another extension
∗10
741 (UK/HK) or 741#
Call Forward (All): Clear from
another extension
∗11
751 (UK/HK) or 751#
Call Forward (No Answer): Set
71 + (Extension 0-9999)
723 (UK/HK) or 723# +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (No Answer): Clear
∗12
733 (UK/HK) or 733# +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (No Answer): Set
from another extension
∗13
743 (UK/HK) or 743#
Call Forward (No Answer): Clear
from another extension
∗14
753 (UK/HK) or 753#
Call Forward (Busy): Set
72 + (Extension 0-9999)
722 (UK/HK) or 722# +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (Busy): Clear
∗15
732 (UK/HK) or 732# +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (Busy): Set from
another extension
∗16
742 (UK/HK) or 742#
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
Default Flexible Feature Code
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
149
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Feature Description
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
Call Forward (Busy): Clear from
another extension
∗17
752 (UK/HK) or 752#
DND Set/Clear
∗18
720 (UK/HK) or 720#
DND Set from Attendant
∗19
740 (UK/HK) or 740#
DND Clear from Attendant
∗20
750 (UK/HK) or 750#
Call Forward (All/Busy/No-Answer/
DND): Clear
∗21
7∗∗
Alarm Set
∗22
∗31
Alarm Clear
∗23
∗39
BGM On/Off
∗24
∗30
Day 1/Night Toggle
∗25
760 (UK/HK) or 760#
Day 2
∗26
761 (UK/HK) or 761#
Night 1
∗27
762 (UK/HK) or 762#
Night 2 (for 2-Way VM)
∗28
763 (UK/HK) or 763#
Paging
∗29 + (Page Group No.)
# + (Zone No.)
Meet-Me Answer
∗30
##
Call Pickup Group-All Calls
∗31
701 (UK/HK) or 701#
Call Pickup Group-Exchange Line
Calls Only
∗32
702 (UK/HK) or 702#
Call Pickup Group-designated
(pick up a call in another Pickup
Group)
∗33 + (Call Pickup Grp 1-99)
703 (UK/HK) or 703#
Direct Call Pickup
73 + (Extension 0-9999)
Ext. Directory Name Assignment
∗34
∗35
∗36
∗37
∗38
∗39
∗40
∗41
Speed-Dial Directory Name
Assignment
∗42
MCO-1 Access (initial setting: 9)
∗43
Exchange Line Call Pickup
Headset Mode On/Off
Conference Key
Transfer Key
Program Key
Recall - Flash Key
PSD Name Assignment
MCO-2 Access (initial setting: 81)
MCO-3 Access (initial setting: 82)
MCO-4 Access (initial setting: 83)
MCO-5 Access (initial setting: 84)
Callback at Busy Tone
Camp-on at Busy Tone
150
Section 700 - Operation
∗44
∗45
∗46
∗47
∗49
∗50
ICX issued September 1998
Default Flexible Feature Code
704 (UK/HK) or 704#
*0
9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia)
81
82
83
84
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Feature Description
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
Message-Waiting Set at Busy Tone
∗51
Message-Waiting Priority Set at Busy
Tone
∗52
Voice Call/Tone Call Toggle
∗53
∗54
Message-Waiting Set at Ringback
Tone
∗55
Message-Waiting Priority Set at
Ringback Tone
∗56
Busy Override Set
Exchange Line Port Confirm
∗57
∗58
∗59
∗60
VM Transfer Key 1
74 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)
VM Transfer Key 2
75 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)
Variable Mode
✱61
Account Code Entry
8-Party Conference
Extension Port Confirm
Default Flexible Feature Code
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
8#
788 (UK/HK) or 788#
Call Logging Confirmation Mode Start ✱62
Station Call Park Hold/Answer
✱63
Station Call Park Hold
✱64
Station Call Park Answer (Own Ext.)
✱65
Station Call Park Answer (Other Ext.)
✱66
Station Call Park Transfer
✱67
Release Key
✱68
Answer Key
✱69
OHVA Key
✱70
Split Key
✱71
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Key
✱72
ANY Key
*8 + (Up to 4 digits 0 - 9, #, or *)
771 (UK/HK) or 771#
772 (UK/HK) or 772#
773 (UK/HK) or 773#
774 (UK/HK) or 774#
Handsfree Answerback
Description
Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset.
The System must be programmed for Voice Calling for you to use this feature. You must press 1
during a call to switch from Tone Calling to Voice Calling.
Operation
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
151
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To answer calls using Handsfree Answerback:
Action
Result
1. When the intercom call arrives, confirm that the MIC LED
is off.
(If it is lit, press the MIC key to turn it off.)
2. Speak into the microphone to answer.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Handsfree Answerback can be used to respond to only voice calls from other extensions - not
tone calls.
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension Class of Service (COS) that
allows Voice Calling.
Handsfree Operation
Description
Handsfree Operation allows you to use all available System features without lifting the handset. Any
speakerphone can be operated handsfree.
Operation
To initiate Handsfree Operation:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Phone is offhook with access to full range
of calling features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
152
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Considerations
•
N/A
Headset Operation
Description
Headset Operation allows you to handle calls with a headset instead of with the handset or
speakerphone.
Operation
To answer calls using the Headset Operation:
Note: If Headset mode is already on, the following procedure turns it off. If Headset mode is off,
this procedure turns it on.
Action
Result
1. Pick up the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Enter 90 for Headset mode.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
A headset must be installed.
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-3: Extension COS (Dial Tone Stop)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Intercom Dial Tone is enabled/disabled regardless of Headset mode (per programming for the
Extension Class of Service [COS])
Hot Dial Pad
Description
The dial pad on digital key phones can be designated as “hot” on an extension-by-extension basis.
The Hot Dial Pad allows the user to initiate a call without going offhook. Extensions with the Hot
Dial Pad enabled can initiate calls by pressing any of the numeric keys (0-9). The “*” and “#” keys
are not hot.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
153
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
The Dial Pad can be hot under these conditions:
•
When the extension is idle
•
When the extension is holding a call
•
When the extension is receiving a page.
The Dial Pad cannot be hot under these conditions:
•
When a call is ringing at the extension (intercom or Exchange Line)
•
When the extension is on a call.
Related Programming
•
FF3 0: Hot Dial Pad
Considerations
Paging: The Hot Dial Pad cannot be used to initiate a page.
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
154
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
•
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
• Dallied number displays
• EXT LED lights
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
EXT LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The Handsfree Answerback feature can be used to respond to only voice calls from other
extensions - not tone calls.
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
155
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialled by pressing the FL/R
key.
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialled:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
OR...
Press a vacant Exchange Line key or enter a exchange line
access code.
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX =
exchange line number)
2. Press the FL/R key.
Last number dialled displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Line key LED turns red, then goes off.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and Exchange Line calls or Exchange Line calls only.
Line Appearances
Description
The System provides three types of line appearances
•
•
•
Direct Station Select (DSS) / Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Appearances
Direct Line (DL) Appearances
MCO Line Appearance
DSS/BLF Appearances
When a DSS/BLF key is programmed, it automatically provides one-touch dialling and DSS and BLF
for the assigned extension numbers. If desired, the DSS/BLF key can also provide ring or delayed ring
156
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
monitor. For example, you can set extension A as a DSS/BLF ringing key on extension B. When
extension A rings, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B flashes and the phone rings.
Ringing or delayed ringing can be set on extensions which have a BLF key. The LED of the DSS/BLF
key flashes green during ringing and the display shows the BLF extension number.
When extension A is in use, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B lights red. If one extension
has the Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature activated, the DSS/BLF key lights green.
Four DSS/BLF modes are available as follows:
DSS/BLF Type
FF Key
Entry
BLF LED Extension
Indication
Call
Call
Pickup
Ring
Ring
Voice Mail
(Immed.) (Delayed) Transfer
DSS Only (No
Pick Up/No Ring)
(9 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
DSS/BLF
Immediate Ring
(81 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
DSS/BLF Delayed (82 + Ext #)
Ring
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
DSS/BLF No Ring (83 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Operation
To assign a DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Press the PROG key.
2. Press the FF key to be assigned the DSS/BLF appearance.
3. Press the Redial key.
4. Enter the code for the desired DSS/BLF mode as follows:
9+ Ext # ---- DSS Mode Only
81+ Ext # --- DSS/BLF Immediate Ring
82 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF Delayed Ring
83 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF No Ring
5. Press the HOLD key.
To make an intercom call using the DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Press the flashing DSS/BLF key.
To pick up a call on a DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the flashing DSS/BLF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
157
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: BLF Call Pickup
FF4-0-04: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
•
If several calls arrive at a DSS/BLF key, the calls are queued and ring on a first-in, first-out basis.
If a BLF key has a second call while busy and off- hook signalling is enabled, the BLF key starts
blinking. The call can be answered by pressing the BLF key or going on hook and then off hook.
Direct In Line Appearances
Direct In Line (DIL) keys are used to originate and receive calls over specific exchange line numbers
(DIL keys can be assigned to any exchange line number).
The LED for a DIL key will flash red on an incoming call even if the Exchange Line is set to ring. If
another extension answers the call, the LED on the telephone will light solid red.
Operation
Operation
Action
1. Press an idle DIL key.
To originate a exchange line call...
2. The key blinks green as the call is made.
To place a call on Exclusive Exchange Line Hold (page
133)...
1. Press the DIL key.
To place a call on System Exchange Line Hold (page 133)...
1. Press the HOLD key.
To transfer a call...
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Dial the destination extension.
3. Press the PROG key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: Key Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Multi-Exchange Line (MCO) Appearances
Description
You can make and receive Exchange Line calls using a Multi-Exchange Line (MCO) key. Each
extension can have up to 5 MCO keys.
158
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
An MCO key can be assigned to any of the pooled exchange line groups. Pressing the MCO key is the
same as dealing the MCO Access Code (usually 9, 81-84).
Operation
Operation
Action
To originate a exchange line call
Press an idle MCO key.
The key blinks (green) as the call is made.
To receive a call on an MCO key.
If ringing line preference is enabled, go off-hook.
If ringing line preference is not enabled, go offhook and press the MCO key with the green
flashing LED.
The LED lights solid green.
To place a call on Exclusive exchange line Hold
Press the MCO key.
The key flashes green while the call is held.
To place a call on System Exchange Line Hold
Press the HOLD key.
The key flashes green while the call is held.
To transfer a call
Press HOLD, dial the destination extension, then
press PROG (if on-hook transfer is off) or go onhook.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: ARS for MCO Access Code 1/Route Advance for MCO Access Code
FF1-3: MCO Group
FF5-2: MCO Outgoing Exchange Line Assignments
FF5-3: MCO Incoming Exchange Line Assignments
FF4: FF Key Assignments
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the MCO key that flashes red to answer an outside call.
If you are already on a call appearing on an MCO key and you press another MCO key, a line on
the other MCO key is selected and the first call is dropped.
If an Exchange Line key is assigned, the Exchange Line Key LED will light when that specific
exchange line is used instead of the MCO key LED.
There are five groups of outside lines: 9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) and 81-84
(default).
MCO keys cannot be assigned on the DSS/72 or the EM/24.
An MCO key must be assigned in programming mode. The MCO key cannot be assigned by the
end user with FF key assignments.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
159
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Message Key
Description
The System supports the MSG FF key on the VB-44225 large-display phone. This key provides the
following functionality:
•
Message Wait Callback: If a callback message has been left by another extension, you can
press the MSG FF key to place an automatic callback to that extension. If more than one
callback message has been received, pressing the MSG FF key performs auto-callback in the
order received.
Priority Message Wait Callback (One-Touch Voice Mail Access): You can press the MSG
FF key to automatically access your voice mailbox. The phone will dial your voice mailbox
and send access codes (if programmed) for retrieving new messages.
•
Operation
To automatically call back an extension that left a message or to access Voice Mail:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG FF key.
Automatically call back to extension
OR...
Automatic access to Voice Mail
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1: Voice Mail ID Code
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
The MSG FF key must be assigned first (default -*08).
The Message lamp lights when a message has been received.
If more than one callback message has been received, pressing the MSG FF key performs autocallback in the order received.
The MSG FF key works only when the phone is idle or receiving internal dial tone.
Auto-callback is always enabled for large display phones.
Messages are accessed in a first-in, first-out order for Message Wait, except Priority Message
Wait, which is typically sent by Voice Mail.
Message Waiting / Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
160
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. While the phone is still ringing, or when you hear the busy
tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4 (UK/HK)
or 4#).
MSG Accepted displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• Message lamp flashes at called extension
• MSG EXT XXX displays (where XXX
= calling extension number) or name
of calling extension displays at called
extension
To answer a message waiting indication (callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6) or
press the MSG FF key if using a large-display phone.
• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent the message waiting indication
• Message lamp goes off when your call
is answered
To cancel a callback message:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5) or
press the MSG FF key if using a large-display phone.
MSG Cleared displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Message lamp goes off
Note: Message waiting/callback messages may also be cancelled by either the originator or the
receiver by calling the other party.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/cancel)
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
161
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/cancel)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 62.
Mute Function
Description
Mute Function allows you to block outgoing audio to the other party while on a call.
With 44-Series phones, audio can be blocked through both the microphone and the handset. (For
handset mute, an FF key must first be assigned as a MIC key.)
Operation
To block outgoing audio using the Handset Mute (VB-D4,VB-D6/VB-442XX-Series
phones only):
Action
Result
1. During a handset call, press the MIC key.
MIC LED blinks.
Outgoing audio is blocked through
phone’s handset
2. To turn Mute off, press the MIC key again.
To block outgoing audio using the Microphone Mute:
Action
Result
1. During a handset call, press the MIC FF key
MIC LED off.
Outgoing audio is blocked through
phone’s microphone
2. To turn Mute off, press the MIC FF key again.
MIC LED on.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: Key Assignment
Considerations
162
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
The fixed MIC key works both for handset mute and microphone mute. But only VB-D4,VB-D6/VB442XX-Series phones have the fixed MIC key, so others must assign an FF key as a MIC key.
Offhook Monitor
Description
Offhook Monitor lets you put a call on speaker while the handset is offhook. You can still
communicate with the other party via the handset, but you will also be able to hear the other party on
the phone’s speaker. The other party can only hear what is transmitted through your handset however,
because audio is not transmitted through your microphone.
Operation
To put a call on speaker using the Offhook Monitor:
Action
Result
1. During a handset call, press the ON/OFF key.
• Other party is audible through speaker
and handset
• Phone’s microphone is mute
2. To take a caller off speaker (disable Offhook Monitor) but
continue the call via the handset, press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Offhook Monitor
Considerations
•
Offhook Monitor is available on 44-Series phones only.
•
Offhook Monitor can be disabled system-wide.
Offhook Signalling
Description
Offhook Signalling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another Exchange Line call has
arrived or a call is camped-on.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
163
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
First call on hold
2. Press the flashing FF key for the Exchange Line of the
incoming call.
Note: For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 119.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: Exchange Line Off-Hook Signal.
Considerations
•
The Exchange Line call type may be multiple ring, direct, BLF Ring, or camp-on.
•
The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
During a conference call
During an OHVA or Busy override
Data Privacy is enabled
the receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Phase 2.0
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can also
transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature. The called
party may optionally reply to (answer) an OHVA call.
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
164
Busy signal
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8).
• OHVA EXT XXX displays if busy
extension called (where XXX = calling
extension.
• EXT LED flashes
4. Make your announcement
To answer an OHVA:
Action
Result
1. Press the OHVA Split key.
Split key flashes red
Note: You must program an FF key as a split key (default =
*71) to use this feature.
2. To return to the previous call, press the Split key again.
The OHVA originating party receives
Busy signal.
To transfer a call using OHVA:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key to put the current call on hold.
Current call on hold
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.
Busy signal
3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8) and announce
the call to be transferred.
4. If transfer is:
• Not accepted, retrieve the call by pressing the associated flashing MCO key (if an appearing call) or by
pressing the HOLD key (if a non appearing call).
• Accepted, and On-hook Transfer is enabled for your
extension, replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
key.
If On-hook Transfer is not enabled for your extension,
press the PROG key (or RELEASE key if using DSS/
72).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
165
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To answer a call after it has been announced using the OHVA:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset.
Your extension rings
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1 0 03: Extension COS OHVA Originate
FF1 0 03: Extension COS OHVA Receive
FF3: Extension COS Assignments
FF4: FF Key Assignments
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
The held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA hangs up.
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return to
the extension sending the OHVA by transfer recall timer.
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
If a Split key is assigned to the extension that receives an OHVA call, when an OHVA is being
received, the Split key blinks green. If the split key is pressed during an OHVA call to answer,
the Split key lights red. If the split key is pressed again to terminate the OHVA conversation, the
Split key extinguishes.
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
One-Touch Keys
Description
You can use one-touch keys to store telephone numbers, speed dial numbers, or feature access codes.
To dial the stored number, you go offhook and press the desired key.
Operation
To program a one-touch key for outside telephone numbers:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Dial the phone number to be stored.
166
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign an System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers to a one-touch key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the MEMORY key.
5. Enter the SSD bin number to be programmed.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To chain 2 to 6 SSD numbers to a single one-touch key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the MEMORY key.
5. Enter the SSD bin number that contains the first part of the
number to be dialled.
6. If a pause is required, press the FL/R key
• Pause occurs between access code and
telephone number
• R displays
7. Repeat steps 4-5 (up to 5 more times) for each additional
speed dial number to be chained.
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign a feature code or extension number to a one-touch key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
167
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. If the System is set for MCO Code level, press the following
keys MEMORY * #. Otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Enter the desired feature code or extension number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To check a programmed one-touch key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the one-touch key to be checked.
Programmed data displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF8-1: PSD Numbers
FF8-1: PSD Names
Considerations
•
One-touch keys 1-10 are the same as Personal Speed Dial (PSDs) numbers 80-89.
Onhook Dialling
Description
Onhook Dialling is a standard feature for key telephones where you can dial onhook using the
dialpad, one-touch keys, or FF keys.
Operation
To dial onhook:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
168
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: Paging Override
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
169
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
FF1-0-04: Exchange Line COS (Paging)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF2: Exchange Line COS
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
You can assign the paging access code to a one-touch or FF key.
•
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
•
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
•
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.
Reset Call
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
To use Reset Call to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension number.
Busy tone
3. Dial the last digit of the next extension number.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
170
The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as
the first extension.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Ringing Line Preference
Description
Ringing Line Preference enables an extension to answer a ringing call by simply picking up the
handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.
Operation
To answer a call using Ringing Line Preference:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF3 (Extensions): Ringing Line Preference by Handset.
FF3: Ringing Line Preference (ON/OFF)
Considerations
•
If disabled in Extension Programming, you must press the line key or enter the feature code for
incoming pick-up in order to answer a call.
Speed Dialling
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
•
•
•
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignment
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
You can assign up to 10 PSD numbers to the one-touch keys on a non-display or small-display phone,
and up to 20 PSD numbers to the soft keys on a large-display phone. Once the PSD numbers have
been assigned, you dial them by pressing the appropriate key. (For additional information, see “OneTouch Keys” on page 166.)
You can also enter a name up to 7 characters for each of the PSD numbers. This allows PSD numbers
to be confirmed by name rather than by number.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
171
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
(UK/HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Enter Spd Dial displays
4. Dial the phone number.
Stored Spd Dial displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To check a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the MEMORY key.
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Programmed data displays
5. If you want to check the next PSD number, press the HOLD
key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
172
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To delete a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
(UK/HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Cleared Spd Dial displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF8-1: PSD Numbers
FF8-1: PSD Names
Considerations
•
•
•
•
PSD number can be dialled from One-Touch keys. (For additional information, see “One-Touch
Keys” on page 166.)
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
If the called party’s number and name are stored in the PSD code, that information appears on the
display when you use the speed dial code.
Speed dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to
use.
To indicate. . .
ICX-25-700
Enter/Press
Shown on Display?
Digit or character
0, 1 - 9, *, #
yes (unless preceded by MEMORY * 2 - see
below)
Intercom Level *
MEMORY * #
no
MCO Code 9 (UK/HK) or 0
(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) **
MEMORY * 0
no
MCO Code 81**
MEMORY * 71
no
MCO Code 82**
MEMORY * 72
no
MCO Code 83**
MEMORY * 73
no
MCO Code 84**
MEMORY * 74
no
Pause
FL/R
no
DP - DTMF Code
MEMORY * *
no
SSD Code
MEMORY NN(N)
no
ICX issued September 1998
173
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To indicate. . .
Section 700 - Operation
Enter/Press
Hyphen (-)
PROG
Display Number (Start / Stop)
***
MEMORY * 2
Shown on Display?
-
*
Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension
number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.
** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should
seize the next available exchange line when dialling. (Not needed if your System is set
for Exchange Line Level.) See Note below.
*** Indicates that the enclosed digits should not be displayed during dialling. Must precede
and follow the digits that you do not want displayed. Example: MEMORY *2 5554143 MEMORY *2.
Note: The System has two levels - Exchange Line Level and Intercom Level. If set at
Exchange Line Level (default), you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a
feature access code or extension number for speed dialling. If the System is set at Intercom
Level, you must enter the MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialling.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
(UK/HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Enter Spd Dial displays
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
Stored Spd Dial displays
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
174
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
A displays
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To check an SSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the MEMORY key.
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Programmed data displays
5. If you want to check the next SSD number, press the HOLD
key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To delete an SSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
(UK/HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Cleared Spd Dial displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
175
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
FF1-0-15, 16, & 17: SSD Blocks
•
FF1-0-02: SSD Digits
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (SSD Assignment)
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Number
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Name
Considerations
•
If numbers do not appear on the display when you use SSD codes (00-79 or 000-799), your
extension is not programmed to display that data.
•
The System can be programmed to allow SSD numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key
or by entering the speed dial bin number.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Note: Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been
programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.
Operation
To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:
Action
Result
1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
3. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
(UK/HK) or 710#).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-90).
Enter Spd Dial displays
5. Press the MEMORY key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains
the first part of the number to be dialled.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs
to be dialled.
8. Press the HOLD key when finished.
176
ICX issued September 1998
Stored PSDXXX displays
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To use a PSD Key that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. If necessary, select the exchange line group (9, 81-84).
(Normally the exchange line is selected by the speed dial
numbers.)
2. Press the PSD key.
To manually link speed dial keys together:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
3. If you are using a PSD number, press the one-touch key for
the first part of the number.
If you are using an SSD number, press the MEMORY key,
then enter the SSD bin number.
4. Use the one-touch keys or press the MEMORY key and
enter the SSD codes to dial the parts of the phone number
until it is completed.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Speed Dial Name Assignments
You can assign names to PSD numbers from a key telephone without entering the programming
mode. If allowed in the Extension Class of Service (COS), you can also assign names to SSD
numbers.
(PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16
characters.)
Operation
PSD Names:
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
177
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.
A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =
PSD bin 80)
5. Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD
bin number.
A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX
= desired PSD bin number)
6. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
179.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 181.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data
7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 179.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 181.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired PSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
9. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next PSD bin number displays
10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.
SSD Names:
To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
178
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
-SSDXXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
7. Press the FL/R key to clear the current data.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
8. Enter the speed dial name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
179.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 181.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 179.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 181.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next SSD bin number displays
12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key and
repeat steps 5-11.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
Example 1. Large-display phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
179
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
180
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Example 2. Small-display phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.)
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
-
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
181
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (User Log-in)
•
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF8-1: SSD & PSD
Considerations
•
The ability to assign SSD names is allowed/restricted to anyone with a COS that allows access to
User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User Maintenance” of this document.)
Step Call (Reset Call)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the system allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
To use step call to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
182
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial an extension.
3. When you hear busy tone, dial the last digit of another extension.
EXAMPLE: You dial Extension 213, but it is busy. To dial Extension 214, press “4”.
Related Programming
FF1-2 : Dial Plan
FF1-002-008 : Step calling (Intercom calls)
FF1-002-009 : Step calling (DISA)
Considerations
•
The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as
the first extension.
•
If you program to set step call, following feature are not available.
• Camp-on (EXT. No +2 (UK/HK) or 2#)
• Call Back Request (EXT. No +3 (UK/HK) or 3#)
• Message Wait (EXT. No +4 (UK/HK) or 4#, EXT. No +5 (UK/HK) or 5#)
• Intercom Busy Override (EXT. No +9 (UK/HK) or 9#)
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
Enter Alarm hhmm displays
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM).
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
Alarm HH:MM displays (where HH =
hour and MM = minutes)
183
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Time display disappears
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
An alarm tone (default = 16 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle exchange line to make an outside code:
•
•
•
•
Exchange Line Access
Direct Exchange Line Access
MCO Line Preference
MCO Exchange Line Access
Exchange Line Key Access
You can access an outside line by pressing a Exchange Line key.
Operation
To access an outside line:
Action
Result
1. Press a vacant Exchange Line key.
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
2. Dial the phone number
184
Dialled phone number displays
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Direct Exchange Line Access
Extensions can seize a specific exchange line for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct
Exchange Line Access to test exchange lines or to access data exchange lines.
Operation
To use Direct Exchange Line Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Enter the Direct Exchange Line Access code (default = 88).
Dialled number displays
3. Enter the desired exchange line number.
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
4. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
185
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Exchange Line Access)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Line Preference
MCO Line Preference allows you to place an outside call by simply picking up the handset. When you
go offhook, the MCO 1 exchange line group is automatically accessed.
Operation
To place a call using MCO Line Preference:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX =
exchange line number)
2. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: MCO Exchange Line Access
•
FF3: MCO
•
FF5-2: MCO Exchange Line Groups (Outbound)
Considerations
•
You can press the ON/OFF key to get intercom dial tone.
MCO Exchange Line Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle
exchange line from the MCO exchange line group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle exchange line:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
186
ICX issued September 1998
Intercom dial tone
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
2. Enter the exchange line access number (9 (UK/HK) or 0
(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) or 81-84). (See Table 14.)
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
• CO XXX displays (where XXX =
exchange line number)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-3: MCO Access
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-2: MCO Exchange Line Group (Outbound)
FF7: ARS/TRS
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different exchange line groups.
Each exchange line group can support up to 50 outside lines.
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO exchange line access codes. System defaults for
MCO exchange line access codes are displayed in the following table.
MCO1 can have up to 5 exchange line groups assigned by the Advanced Exchange Line Group
feature.
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 14. MCO Exchange Line Access Codes
MCO Group
Exchange Line Access
Code
MCO1
9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
Malaysia, Indonesia)
81
82
83
84
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)) and
all outside lines in a exchange line group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free.
Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Exchange Line Callback alert
tone rings.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
187
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set Exchange Line Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the Exchange Line key or enter a exchange line access
code.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 (UK/HK) or
3#.)
Wait CBK-TRK displays
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
5. Wait for the Exchange Line Callback alert tone.
To respond to the Exchange Line Callback alert tone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Exchange Line Queuing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Response to the Exchange Line Callback must be within 15 seconds or Exchange Line Queuing
will be cancelled.
The Exchange Line Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to
make a call using the MCO Exchange Line Access feature.
•
Variable Mode
Description
Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys on a display phone to access selected features when
your phone is in the following state:
•
•
188
While receiving intercom Dial Tone or during dialling - up to 10 functions
While receiving intercom ringback tone - up to 5 functions
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
While receiving intercom busy tone - up to 10 functions
While talking in intercom mode, during Exchange Line seizure, or during Exchange Line talk
- up to 5 functions
Each extension may have customized soft key features available. The customization must be
programmed by the dealer.
To access the feature beside the soft key, simply press the associated soft key.
Operation
To enable Variable Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the Variable Mode FF key
AUTO FNC Mode displays
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
Programmed features display
To Execute a Variable Mode Function:
Action
Result
1. Press the NEXT or PREV keys on the large display telephone or the up or down arrow keys on the small display telephones until the desired function appears
2. Press the soft key next to the desired function
The variable mode function executes
To cancel Variable Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
AUTO FNC Mode displays
2. Press the Variable Mode FF key.
3. Press the ON/OFF key again.
To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Small Display Telephone
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + Fixed Feature Code (see Table
13 on page 148)
The variable mode function executes
or
press PROG + 95 + (XX) + FL/R + Flexible Feature Code
(see Table 13 on page 148)
(where XX is the Flexible Screen position as listed below).
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
189
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Large Display Telephone
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Using the FUNCTION EXT menu, display the desired
extension function location (see Flexible Screen Positions
below)
3. Press PROG + soft key + Fixed Feature Code (see Table 13
on page 148)
or
press PROG + 95 + (XX) + FL/R + Flexible Feature Code
(see Table 13 on page 148)
4. Press the ON/OFF key
Flexible Screen Positions
Variable Mode Display
Position
Displays at
Position 1 to 10
Intercom Dial Tone/Intercom Dial
Position 11 to 15
Intercom Ringback Tone
Position 16 to 25
Intercom Busy Tone
Position 26 to 30
Talk
Hardware Requirements
•
A 44-Series Display Telephone or the VB-43225 Large Display Telephone
Related Programming
•
•
FF4-2: Flexible Screens
FF3-0: Variable Modes
Considerations
•
•
The small display telephone will exit variable mode after a variable mode function is executed.
The large display telephone will stay in variable mode after a function is executed.
Voice Recognition
Description
Voice Recognition allows you to dial another extension or a speed dial number using verbal
commands. You can also quickly access various telephone features by voice.
Hardware Requirements
•
190
VB-D411DSVUK/VB-44244 12 Key Telephone required
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
VB-44101 Voice Recognition Adaptor required.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
You must pre-program the desired calling information into the telephone’s Voice Recognition
Unit in order for the System to recognize the verbal commands.
Volume Control
Description
The System allows you to set different receiving volumes for the handset, speaker, intercom ring tone,
and incoming ring tone.
Operation
To adjust the volume while your phone is in use:
Action
Result
1. Press the VOLUME (▲ or ▼) key:
• During ringing to adjust intercom or incoming ring tone
Intercom dial tone
• During a call to adjust handset or speaker volume
To adjust ringer volume while your phone is idle:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Enter 9, then 1 to adjust the incoming ring tone.
OR...
Pseudo ring tone
Enter 9, then 2 to adjust the intercom ring tone.
4. Press the VOLUME (▲ or ▼) key to adjust the loudness of
the tone.
5. Press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3-0: Ring Volume Control
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
191
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
Extension programming determines whether or not you can set separate volume levels for
Exchange Line incoming ring tone and intercom ring tone.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Phase 2.0
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service allows an extension user to “carry” his or her toll
restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service feature can be used, a Walking Class of
Service code must be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking Class of Service code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter 87 (UK/HK) or 87#.
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking Class of Service code (0001-9999)
5. Enter a exchange line access code (9 or 81-84)
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking Class of Service remains in
effect until you replace the handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1-08: Walking Class of Service Code
Considerations
192
•
The same Walking Class of Service code can be used on more than one extension.
•
Walking Class of Service mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
•
ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking Class of Service.
•
Before entering a new Walking COS code, you must first clear the existing code.
•
When Walking COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears in Call
Logging.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
This chapter describes features that are available with the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT).
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Digital Single Line Telephone
195
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
195
196
Verified Account Codes
197
Attendant Group Calls
198
Auto Repeat Dial
199
Background Music
199
Busy Override
200
Callback Request
201
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
202
Call Forwarding - Busy
203
Call Forwarding - No Answer
204
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
205
202
Call Hold
System Hold
206
206
Floating Hold
207
Exclusive Hold
208
Broker’s Hold
209
Call Park
211
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
211
Extension Direct Pickup
212
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup
213
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup
213
211
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
214
214
Unsupervised Transfer
215
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
216
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
217
Conference Calls
Three-Party Conferencing
218
218
Eight-Party Conferencing
219
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
193
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
194
Page
Do-Not-Disturb
220
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
222
Flash
222
Hot Line
223
Intercom Calling
223
Last Number Redial
224
Message Waiting / Callback
225
Onhook Dialling
226
Offhook Signalling
227
Offhook Voice Announce
228
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
229
Reset Call
230
Speed Dialling
Personal Speed Dial
231
231
System Speed Dial
233
Speed Dial Linking
234
Timed Reminder Call
235
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Direct Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
236
237
MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
237
229
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
238
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
239
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Digital Single Line Telephone
Figure 5 illustrates the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT). For more information on DSLT
operation, see the ICX Key Telephone/DSLT User’s Guide.
Figure 5.
DSLT
No.
NAME
No.
NAME
1
1
2 3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PRS
8 TUV
9WXY
*
0OPER
#
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System
Message Detail Recording (Call Logging) record.
In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS (Call Barring) level to allow calls
to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging). During a phone call, a
station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code. The entered Code will display on
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
195
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
the phone’s LCD as it’s dialled, so the user can tell it’s being registered. Then later, the Call Logging
reports will show the Code dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes you can use in the ICX:
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity; the user can enter anything from 1-10
digits long. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced Account Codes (the user must
enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can enter a code, but doesn’t have
to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls,
the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code
before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit code that has been
preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. (It is possible to enter up to 10 digits for a Verified
Account Code; however, only the first 4 digits will be used to verify the code.) These codes can also
be either forced or voluntary. You can program these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service
(TRS) - Call Barring Class assignment so that, when entered, they will override the extension’s TRS
Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float” from phone to phone, placing calls that would
normally be restricted on that phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an
account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.
To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
5. Press a vacant Exchange Line key or enter an exchange line
access code.
6. Dial the phone number.
196
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To enter an account code during an outside call:
Action
Result
1. During a call, press the MEMORY key.
2. Press the # key.
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call
Barring can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that
changes the TRS. After a call is made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified
account code.
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits).
4. Press a vacant Exchange Line key or enter an exchange line
access code.
5. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
An Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code
records.
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Forced Account Code
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Forced Account
•
•
FF3: Verified Account
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS Class
Considerations
•
•
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits
only.
Account codes will be cancelled after using Exchange Line queuing.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
197
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS (Call Barring) Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Non-Verified
TRS Class for Forced
Account Code
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
(FF1 0 19 0001)
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 (UK/HK) or 9
(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3-0: Extension Number
•
FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups
Considerations
198
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
•
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
•
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.
•
Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Auto Repeat Dial
Description
If you press the REDIAL key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically
redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number
answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.
Operation
To use Auto Repeat Dial:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter an exchange line access code.
3. Dial the phone number.
Busy tone
4. Press the REDIAL key.
System automatically redials number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Auto Repeat Dial)
•
FF3: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Background Music
Description
If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle
telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the
phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.
The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source. If MOH is
provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For more information on
“MOH”, see page 46.)
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
199
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To turn Background Music on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To turn Background Music off:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors,
and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded
music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment
fail to obtain such a license.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into one another’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
200
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To use Extension Busy Override:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 (UK/HK) or 9#).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(system programming required)
• Connected to both parties
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF3: Data Security
Considerations
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
•
The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will
be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that
extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
201
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 (UK/HK) or
3#).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
To respond to the callback request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
System automatically redials extension
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice
Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
•
Call Forwarding - Busy
•
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded.
202
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721#.
• For another extension, enter 741 (UK/HK) or 741#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 231.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731#.
• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
203
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722#.
• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 231.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
3. For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732#.
4. For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752#.
5. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
204
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723#.
• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 231.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733#.
• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to set or cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your
own extension in one step.
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
205
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All/Busy/No-Answer and DND Cancel)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding DND activated.For
example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
•
If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a
System Speed Dial (SSD) code.
•
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
•
You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call
Forwarding - Busy are set. Cancelling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other
modes will remain set until cancelled individually.
•
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
•
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
•
You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.
Call Hold
Description
The system provides the following types of Call Hold:
•
System Hold
•
Floating Hold
•
Exclusive Hold
•
Broker’s Hold
•
Call Park (Station)
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
206
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a held call on a specific exchange line:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Exchange Line Answer code (default =
*0).
3. Enter the exchange line number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold by HOLD Key
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold
Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension by
dialling the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.
Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can
be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged
party can then pick up the call by dialling the orbit number.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
207
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To place a call on Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
1.
Result
Enter the Floating Hold Answer feature access code
(default = *9).
2. Enter the Floating Hold orbit number (001-576) for the held
call.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold on HOLD Key
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold Exchange Line calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
208
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation - System vs. Exclusive)
•
FF3-0: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the
HOLD key.
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Press the HOLD key.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Press the HOLD key.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
Exchange Line, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX. One way is to park the call at the
receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer
code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial
the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call.
Operation
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
209
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To park a call on this extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
• Current call on hold
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default 771 (UK/HK)
or 771#).
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default
773 (UK/HK) or 773#).
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
• Current call on hold
•
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default 774 (UK/
HK) or 774#)
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default 772 (UK/
HK) or 772#).
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
Considerations
210
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
•
No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.
•
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Exchange Line Group Pickup
•
Exchange Line Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701 (UK/HK) or 701#).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
211
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702 (UK/HK) or 702#).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 (UK/
HK) or 703#).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-6: Call Pickup Group Assignment
Considerations
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of
the ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704
(UK/HK) or 704#).
212
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup
Exchange Line Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own
MCO incoming exchange line group.
Operation
To use Exchange Line Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Exchange Line Group Pickup code (default = 709
(UK/HK) or 709#).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-3: MCO - Inbound Exchange Line Group Members
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific exchange line
number.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
213
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To use Exchange Line Direct Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Exchange Line Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system hold)
exchange line.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
Call on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
214
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Seize a exchange line and dial the number to which the call
is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a exchange line access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
215
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated,
enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 (UK/
HK) or 2#).
Camp-on tone heard at called extension
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)
Considerations
216
•
On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS),
he/she cannot complete the transfer.
•
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
•
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
•
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
•
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
•
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
•
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
•
If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy
extension.
•
To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the exchange line-toexchange line on-hook transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the
second call but the second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is
busy, the transferred party will receive busy.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the
first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to
the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.
•
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
Operation
To set Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To set Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 (UK/
HK) or 2#).
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.
OR....
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
Press the HOLD key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
217
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Receive)
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF3-0: Auto Camp-on
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “Camping a Call Onto a
Busy Extension” on page 216.
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
optional Conference Card is installed, up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call.
The System supports the following types of Conference Calls:
•
Three-Party Conferencing
•
Eight-Party Conferencing
Three-Party Conferencing
The System supports the following types of three-party conference calls:
•
•
3 extensions
2 extensions and 1 Exchange Line
•
1 extension and 2 Exchange Lines
Operation
To establish a three-party conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Current call on hold
2. Enter an exchange line access code, or dial the number of
the extension you wish to add to the call.
Outside dial tone (if exchange line access
code entered)
3. If you entered an exchange line access code in step 2, dial
the number of the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise, proceed to step 4.
218
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
Connected to party
5. To add another party, repeat steps 1-4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-1: System Timers (Exchange Line to Exchange Line)
Considerations
•
N/A
Eight-Party Conferencing
With the optional Conference Card installed, up to 8 parties can be included in a conference call.
However, only one of the parties can be an Exchange Line (i.e., 8 extensions or 7 extensions and 1
Exchange Line).
Operation
To establish an eight-party conference call from the idle status:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Eight-Party Conference code (default = 788 (UK/
HK) or 788#).
3. Press the HOLD key.
4. Enter an exchange line access code, or dial the number of
the extension you wish to add to the call.
5. If you entered an exchange line access code in step 4, dial
the number of the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise, proceed to step 6.
6. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
Connected to called party
7. To add additional parties to the call, repeat steps 3-6.
To establish an eight-party conference call from your current call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Current call on hold
2. Enter the Eight-Party Conference code (default = 788 (UK/
HK) or 788#).
3. Enter an exchange line access code, or dial the number of
the extension you wish to add to the call.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
219
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. If you entered an exchange line access code in step 3, dial
the number of the party you wish to add to the call.
5. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
6. To add additional parties to the call, press the HOLD key
and repeat steps 3-5.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (8-Party Conference)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to use Eight-party
Conferencing.
If the originating party hangs up, the conference call will be disconnected. If any other party
hangs up, the conference call will remain in progress.
Do-Not-Disturb
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 (UK/HK) or
720#).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
220
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To set DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740
(UK/HK) or 740#).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750
(UK/HK) or 750#).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Forced DND override is available.
•
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
221
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
Description
Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from
DP to DTMF signalling when using a DP exchange line. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail
system using a DP exchange line, you can switch to DTMF signalling to communicate with the Voice
Mail system. (The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and
outgoing timers).
Operation
To switch from DP to DTMF dialling:
Action
Result
1. Press the * key or the # key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1: DTMF
FF2: DP to DTMF (Outgoing)
FF2: DP to DTMF (Incoming)
Considerations
•
N/A
Flash
Description
You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically
reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FLASH key.
Exchange Line programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to
extension dial tone status.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
222
FF1-1: Flash Timer
FF2: Flash Pattern
FF2: Flash Key Operation
FF3: Flash on PROG (Recall)
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Considerations
•
N/A
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
•
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
223
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
•
You cannot change from voice call to tone call.
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dallied by pressing the
REDIAL key.
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dallied:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
OR...
Enter an exchange line access code.
224
ICX issued September 1998
Outside dial tone (if exchange line access
code entered)
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
2. Press the REDIAL key.
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and Exchange Line calls, or Exchange Line calls only.
Message Waiting / Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Ring or busy tone
3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the
busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4
(UK/HK) or 4#).
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
Message lamp flashes at called extension
225
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To answer a message waiting indication (callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).
• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent message waiting indication
• Message lamp goes off when your call
is answered
To cancel a Callback Message:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Message lamp goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/cancel)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/cancel)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 62.
Onhook Dialling
Description
Onhook Dialling allows users to dial without lifting the handset. However, the Digital Single Line
Telephone (DSLT) does not have a microphone so you must lift the handset to talk.
226
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To use onhook dialling:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter an exchange line access code, or dial an extension
number.
3. If you entered an exchange line access code in step 2, dial
the phone number. Otherwise, proceed to step 4.
4. When the call is answered, lift the handset to talk.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Offhook Signalling
Description
Offhook Signalling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another Exchange Line call has
arrived or a call is camped on.
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Hang up and then go off-hook to answer call.
Note: For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 206.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: Exchange Line Off-Hook Signal.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
227
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
The Exchange Line call type may be either multiple ring, direct, or camp-on.
•
The system does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
During a conference call
During an OHVA or Busy override
Data Privacy is enabled
the receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Phase 2.0
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can also
transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature.
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8).
4. Make your announcement
To transfer a call using OHVA:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Current call on hold
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.
Busy signal
3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8) and announce
the call to be transferred.
4. If transfer is: not accepted, press the FLASH key.
Transfer cancelled
5. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
228
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Related Programming
•
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Originate
•
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Receive
•
FF3 (Extension): Extension COS Assignments
•
FF4: FF Key Assignments
Considerations
•
If Onhook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the
OHVA hangs up.
•
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return to
the extension sending the OHVA by Transfer Recall Timer.
•
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
•
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
229
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Paging Override
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)
FF1-0-04: Exchange Line COS (Paging)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF2: Exchange Line COS
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
•
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal.
Reset Call
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
To use Reset Call to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension number.
Busy tone
3. Dial the last digit of the next extension number.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
230
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as
the first extension.
If you program the System for Reset Call, the following features are not available: Camp-on
(Ext. no. + 2 (UK/HK) or 2#), Callback Request (Ext. no. + 3 (UK/HK) or 3#), Message Waiting
(Ext. no. + 4 (UK/HK) or 4#, Ext. no. + 5 (UK/HK) or 5#), Intercom Busy Override (Ext. no. + 9
(UK/HK) or 9#).
•
Speed Dialling
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
•
•
•
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignment
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2.
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
231
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2.
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1: PSD Numbers
•
FF8-1: PSD Names
Considerations
•
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
•
Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to
use.
To indicate . . .
232
Enter/Press
Digit or character
0, 1 - 9, *, #
Intercom Level *
MEMORY * #
MCO Code 9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)**
MEMORY * 0
MCO Code 81**
MEMORY * 71
MCO Code 82**
MEMORY * 72
MCO Code 83**
MEMORY * 73
MCO Code 84**
MEMORY * 74
Pause
REDIAL
DP - DTMF Code
MEMORY * *
SSD Code
MEMORY NN(N)
Hyphen (-)
PROG
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
*
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension
number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.
** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should
seize the next available exchange line when dialling. (Not needed if your System is set
for Exchange Line Level.) See Note below.
Note: The System has two levels - Exchange Line Level and Intercom Level. If set at
Exchange LineExchange Line Level (default), you must enter the code for Intercom Level when
programming a feature access code or extension number for speed dialling. If the System is set at
Intercom Level, you must enter the MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed
dialling.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete call and replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
233
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To delete an SSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or -799).
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-15, 16, & 17 SSD Blocks
FF1-0-02 SSD Digits
FF1-0-03 Extension COS (SSD Assignment)
FF8-1-02: SSD Number
FF8-1-02: SSD Name
Considerations
•
The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 5 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key
or by entering the speed dial bin number.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Note: Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been
programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.
Operation
To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:
Action
Result
1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
3. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
234
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
5. Press the MEMORY key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains
the first part of the number to be called.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs
to be dialled.
8. Press the HOLD key when finished.
To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. If necessary, select the exchange line group (9 (UK/HK) or
0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia), 81-8). (Normally the
exchange line is selected by the speed dial numbers.)
2. Press the MEMORY key.
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
To manually link speed dials together:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key, then enter the PSD or SSD bin
number.
4. Press the MEMORY key and enter the PSD or SSD codes to
dial the parts of the phone number until it is completed.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
235
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM.)
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
•
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
•
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
•
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle exchange line to make an outside call:
236
•
Direct Exchange Line Access
•
MCO Exchange Line Access
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Direct Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Extensions can seize a specific exchange line for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct
Exchange Line Access to test exchange lines or to access data exchange lines.
Operation
To use Direct Exchange Line Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Enter the Direct Exchange Line Access code (default = 88).
3. Enter the desired exchange line number.
Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Exchange Line Access)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle
exchange line from the MCO exchange line group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle exchange line:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the desired exchange line access number (9 (UK/HK)
or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) or 81-84). (See Table
15.)
Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: MCO Access
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
237
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-2: MCO Exchange Line Group (Outbound)
FF7: ARS/TRS
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different exchange line groups.
Each exchange line group can support up to 50 outside lines.
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO exchange line access codes. System defaults for
MCO exchange line access codes are displayed in the following table.
MCO1 can have up to 5 exchange line groups assigned by the Advanced Exchange Line Group
feature.
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 15. MCO Exchange Line Access Codes
MCO Group
Exchange Line Access
Code
MCO1
9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
Malaysia, Indonesia)
81
82
83
84
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9) and all outside lines in a exchange line group are
busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply pick up the handset and dial the
telephone number when the Exchange Line Callback alert tone rings.
Operation
To set Exchange Line Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a exchange line access code (9 or 81-84).
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 (UK/HK) or
3#.)
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
5. Wait for the Exchange Line Callback alert tone.
238
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To respond to the Exchange Line Callback alert tone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Outside dial tone
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Exchange Line Queuing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Response to the Exchange Line Callback must be within 15 seconds or Exchange Line Queuing
will be cancelled.
The Exchange Line Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to
make a call using the MCO Exchange Line Access feature.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Phase 2.0
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service allows an extension user to “carry” his or her toll
restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS Class of Service feature can be used, a Walking Class of Service code must
be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking Class of Service code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter 87.
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking Class of Service code (0001-9999)
5. Enter an exchange line access code (9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) or 81-84)
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking Class of Service remains in
effect until you replace the handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
239
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1-08: Walking Class of Service Code
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
240
The same Walking Class of Service code can be used on more than one extension.
Walking Class of Service mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking Class of Service.
Before entering a new Walking COS code, you must first clear the existing code.
When Walking COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears in Call
Logging.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Chapter 7. SLT Features
SLTs are industry-standard 2500 sets. SLTs are not equipped with feature keys or line keys, so basic
telephone operations are performed by pressing dialpad keys and/or using the switchhook.
This chapter describes the following features that are available with Single Line Telephones (SLTs).
Topic
Page
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
243
243
Verified Account Codes
244
Attendant Group Calls
245
Busy Override
246
Callback Request
247
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
247
Call Forwarding - Busy
248
Call Forwarding - No Answer
249
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
250
248
Call Hold
System Hold
251
251
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
252
Exclusive Hold
253
Broker’s Hold
253
Call Park
254
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
255
Extension Direct Pickup
256
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup
257
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup
258
255
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
258
258
Unsupervised Transfer
259
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
260
Conference Calls
Three-Party Conferencingg
262
262
Eight-Party Conferencing
263
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
264
Flash Send
265
Flash Send
265
Intercom Calling
267
Last Number Redial
268
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
241
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
242
Page
Message Waiting / Callback
270
Offhook Signalling
268
Offhook Voice Announce
269
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
271
271
Reset Call
272
Speed Dialling
Personal Speed Dial
273
273
System Speed Dial
274
Speed Dial Linking
275
Timed Reminder Call
276
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Direct Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
277
277
MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
277
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
279
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
280
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the Call
Logging record.
In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS (Call Barring) level to allow calls
to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with Call Logging. Before making an outgoing call, a station user can silently
enter an accounting or client billing code. Then later, the Call Logging reports will show the Code
dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes you can use in the ICX:
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity; the user can enter anything from 1-10
digits long. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced Account Codes (the user must
enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can enter a code, but doesn’t have
to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to outgoing calls. The user either enters the Code before
accessing an outside line (for forced or voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit code that has been
preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. (It is possible to enter up to 10 digits for a Verified
Account Code; however, only the first 4 digits will be used to verify the code.) These codes can also
be either forced or voluntary. You can program these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service
(TRS) - Call Barring Class assignment so that, when entered, they will override the extension’s TRS
Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float” from phone to phone, placing calls that would
normally be restricted on that phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to outgoing calls only. To assign an account code to an
outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
243
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Press the # key.
5. Enter an exchange line access code.
6. Dial the phone number.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call
Barring can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that
changes the TRS. After a call is made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified
account code.
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (max. 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
5. Enter an exchange line access code.
6. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
An Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code
records.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Forced Account Code
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Forced Account
•
FF3: Verified Account
•
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS Class
Considerations
244
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
•
Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits
only.
•
Account codes will be cancelled after using Exchange Line queuing.-
•
Account codes are not available for a Dial Pulse SLT.
•
SLT telephones can only use account codes with outgoing calls only.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS (Call Barring) Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Non-Verified
Verified
•
•
•
Account Code Based TRS
Class
TRS Class for Forced
Account Code
(FF1 0 19 0001)
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Account Code Based TRS
Class
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Verified Account Code
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes
Considerations
•
N/A
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 (UK/HK) or 9
(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3-0: Extension Number
FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups
Considerations
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
245
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
•
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.
•
Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To set Extension Busy Override:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 (UK/HK) or 9#).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(System programming required)
• Connection to both parties
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF3: Data Security
Considerations
246
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
•
The default for the override alert tone is off. If the override alert tone is enabled, the tone will be
sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can have the System call you back when that extension becomes
free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 (UK/HK) or
3#).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
To respond to the callback request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
System automatically redials extension
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)
FF3-0: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to voice
mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
ICX-25-700
Call Forwarding - All Calls
ICX issued September 1998
247
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
Call Forwarding - Busy
•
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721#.
• For another extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731#.
• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, enter
the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
248
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722#.
• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742#.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732#.
• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call forward No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723#.
• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743#.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
249
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733#.
• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753#.
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your own
extension in one step.
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
250
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3-0: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.
For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
•
•
•
•
Call Hold
Description
The system provides the following types of Call Hold:
•
•
•
•
•
System Hold
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
Exclusive Hold
Broker’s Hold
Call Park (Station)
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash.
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:
Action
Result
1. If onhook, go offhook.
Intercom dial tone
2. Hookflash.
Retrieve call
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
251
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To retrieve a held call on a specific exchange line:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Exchange Line Answer code (default =
*0).
3. Enter the exchange line number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Operation for SLT)
FF3-0: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
Floating Hold allows calls to be placed in a hold orbit (position) for retrieval elsewhere in the system.
Floating Hold is most commonly used by the attendant group when they are unable to locate the
desired party. If the desired party does not answer his/her phone, the attendant places the caller on
Floating Hold and asks over the paging system that the desired party dial *9XXX to retrieve the held
call.
Note: Single Line Telephone (SLT) positions are not able to place a call on Floating Hold. However,
an SLT can retrieve a call on floating.
Operation
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter *9 followed by the Floating Hold Orbit number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
252
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold Exchange Line calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash.
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. If onhook, lift the handset.
2. Hookflash.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs)
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by hookflash.
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Hookflash.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Hookflash.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
253
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
F1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs - Broker’s Hold or Conference)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
If Broker’s Hold is enabled, it is not possible to establish a conference call from an SLT position.
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
Exchange Line, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX. One way is to park the call at the
receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer
code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial
the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call.
Operation
To park a call on this extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the hookswitch.
• Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default 771 (UK/HK)
or 771#)
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default
773 (UK/HK) or 773#).
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the hookswitch.
• Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default 774 (UK/
HK) or 774#)
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
254
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default 772 (UK/
HK) or 772#).
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
Considerations
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
•
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Exchange Line Group Pickup
•
Exchange Line Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
255
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701 (UK/HK) or 701#).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702 (UK/HK) or 702#).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 (UK/
HK) or 703#).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Call Pickup Group Assignment
Considerations
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of
the ringing extension.
256
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704
(UK/HK) or 704#).
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your
own MCO incoming exchange line group.
Operation
To use Exchange Line Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Exchange Line Group Pickup code (default = 709
(UK/HK) or 709#).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-3: MCO Inbound Exchange Line Group Members
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
257
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific exchange line
number.
Operation
To use Exchange Line Direct Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Exchange Line Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system)
exchange line.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
Calls on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
258
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Action
Result
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter an exchange line access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
5. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter an exchange line access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
259
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated,
enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 (UK/
HK) or 2#).
Camp-on tone heard at called extension
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
On-Hook Transfer must be enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service
(COS).
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
260
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also place the first call on hold by
Hookflashing and then answering the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal.
You need only to remain on the line.
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
•
Operation
To use Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To use Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 (UK/
HK) or 2#).
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset.
2. Lift the handset again to be connected to the waiting call.
OR....
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
Hookflash.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: Extension COS
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
261
Chapter 7. SLT Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “To camp a call onto a
busy extension:” on page 266.
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
optional Conference Card is installed, up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call.
The System supports the following types of Conference Calls:
•
•
Three-Party Conferencing
Eight-Party Conferencing
Three-Party Conferencing
The System supports the following types of three-party conference calls:
•
•
•
3 extensions
2 extensions and 1 Exchange Line
1 extension and 2 Exchange Line
Operation
To establish a Three-party Conference Call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the current call on hold.
Current call on hold
2. Enter an exchange line access code, or dial the number of
the extension you wish to add to the call.
3. If you entered an exchange line access code, dial the
number of the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise,
proceed to step 4.
Connected to party
4. Hookflash.
5. To add another party to the call, repeat steps 1-4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
262
FF1-1: System Timers (Exchange Line to Exchange Line)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Broker’s Hold or Conference)
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Broker’s Hold must be disabled to establish a conference call.
Eight-Party Conferencing
With the optional Conference Card installed, up to 8 parties can be included in a conference call. One
of the parties can be a Exchange Line (i.e., 8 extensions or 7 extensions and 1 Exchange Line).
Operation
To establish an Eight-party Conference Call from the idle status:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Eight-Party Conference code (default = 788 (UK/
HK) or 788#).
3. Hookflash.
4. Enter an exchange line access code, or dial the number of
the extension you wish to add to the call.
5. If you entered an exchange line access code, dial the
number of the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise,
proceed to step 6.
6. Hookflash when your call is answered.
Connected to called party
7. To add additional parties to the call, hookflash and repeat
steps 3-6.
To establish an Eight-party Conference Call from your current call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the current call on hold.
Current call on hold
2. Enter the Eight-Party Conference code (default = 788 (UK/
HK) or 788#).
3. Hookflash.
4. Enter an exchange line access code, or dial the number of
the extension you wish to add to the call.
5. If you entered an Exchange Line access code, dial the
number of the party you wish to add to the call. Otherwise,
proceed to step 6.
6. Hookflash when your call is answered.
Connected to called party
7. To add additional parties to the call, hookflash and repeat
steps 3-6.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
263
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (8-party Conference)
•
FF3: Extension COS (Broker’s Hold or Conference)
Considerations
•
A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to use Eight-party
Conferencing.
•
Broker’s Hold must be disabled to establish a conference call.
•
If the originating party hangs up, the conference call will be disconnected. If any other party
hangs up, the conference call will remain in progress.
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set code (default = 720 (UK/HK) or 720#).
3. Replace the handset.
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel code (default = 720 (UK/HK) or
720#).
DND/CD LED light goes off
3. Replace the handset.
264
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To set DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740
(UK/HK) or 740#).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750
(UK/HK) or 750#).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3-0: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Forced DND override is available.
•
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
Flash Send
Description
Flash send allows you to send a flash to a Exchange Line.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
265
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To send a flash on an Exchange Line:
Action
Result
1. Hookflash to place the current Exchange Line call on hold.
Dial tone is returned
2. Press the SLT Flash Send access code (default - 765).
A flash is sent on the Exchange Line. The
Exchange Line will respond according.
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
266
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
•
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered
5. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
•
You cannot change from voice calling to tone calling.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
267
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialled.
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialled:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter 712 (UK/HK) or 712# .
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and Exchange Line calls or Exchange Line calls only.
Offhook Signalling
Description
Offhook Signalling sends a tone over the handset to a busy extension to indicate that a Exchange Line
call has arrived or a call is camped-on.
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
Result
1. Complete the first call and place the handset on hook.
2. After the telephone rings, go off hook.
Hardware Requirements
•
268
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Related Programming
•
•
FF3: Exchange Line Off-Hook Signal
FF1-1: Off-Hook Signal Timer
Considerations
•
•
•
The Exchange Line call type may be either multiple ring, direct, or camp-on.
Offhook signalling is not supported for an ISDN terminal.
The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
• During a conference call
• During an OHVA or Busy override
• Data Privacy is enabled
• Receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Phase 2.0
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement.
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8).
4. Make your announcement
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Originate
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Receive
FF3 (Extension): Extension COS Assignments
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
If On hook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the
OHVA hangs up.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
269
Chapter 7. SLT Features
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
Message Waiting / Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Ring or busy tone
3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the
busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4
(UK/HK) or 4#).
4. Replace the handset.
To answer a message waiting indication (Callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Stutter dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).
Telephone automatically dials extension
that set Message Waiting Indication
To cancel a Callback Message:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
270
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/cancel)
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/cancel)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party voice mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 69.
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired Paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: Paging Override
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
271
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
FF1-0-04: Exchange Line COS (Paging)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF2: Exchange Line COS
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to Paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
•
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
•
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.
Reset Call
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
To use Reset Call to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension.
Busy tone
3. Enter the last digit of the next extension.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
272
The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as
the first extension.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Speed Dialling
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
•
•
•
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignment
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2.
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Dial the number.
5. Press the * key.
6. Replace the handset.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2.
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
273
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Press the * key.
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters.
•
Single Line Telephone SLT can only enter 0, 1-9, *, and #. If a pause, MCO code, intercom level,
Dial Pulse (DP) - Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) code, or SSD code needs to be
programmed, use User Maintenance to program the speed dial.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the * key.
6. Replace the handset.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
274
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Action
Result
3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To delete an SSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 (UK/
HK) or 710#).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Press the * key.
5. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-15, 16, & 17 SSD Blocks
FF1-0-02 SSD Digits
FF1-0-03 Extension COS (SSD Assignment)
FF8-1-02: SSD Number
FF8-1-02: SSD Name
Considerations
•
The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Operation
To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
1. If necessary, access an outside line.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
Outside dial tone
275
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
2. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
3. Enter the desired PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM).
4. Replace the handset.
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
276
N/A
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
•
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
•
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
•
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle exchange line to make an outside call:
•
Direct Exchange Line Access
•
MCO Exchange Line Access
Direct Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Extensions can seize a specific exchange line for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct
Exchange Line Access to test exchange lines or to access data exchange lines.
Operation
To use Direct Exchange Line Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter the Direct Exchange Line Access code (default = 88).
3. Enter the desired exchange line number.
Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Exchange Line Access)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
277
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle
exchange line from the MCO exchange line group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle exchange line:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the desired exchange line access number (9 (UK/HK)
or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) or 81-84). (See Table 16
on page 278.)
Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: MCO Access
•
FF5-2: MCO Exchange Line Group (Outbound)
•
FF7: ARS/TRS
Considerations
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different exchange line groups.
•
Each exchange line group can support up to 50 outside lines.
•
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO exchange line access codes. System defaults for
MCO exchange line access codes are displayed in the following table.
•
MCO1 can have up to 5 exchange line groups assigned by the Advanced Exchange Line Group
feature.
•
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 16. MCO Exchange Line Access Codes
278
MCO Group
Exchange Line Access
Code
MCO1
9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
Malaysia, Indonesia)
81
82
83
84
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)) and
all outside lines in a exchange line group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free.
Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Exchange Line Callback alert
tone rings.
Operation
To set Exchange Line Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter an exchange line access code.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 (UK/HK) or
3#).
4. Replace the handset.
5. Wait for the Exchange Line Callback alert tone.
To respond to the Exchange Line Callback alert tone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Outside dial tone
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Exchange Line Queuing)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Response to the Exchange Line Callback must be within 15 seconds or Exchange Line Queuing
will be cancelled.
•
The Exchange Line Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to
make a call using the MCO Exchange Line Access feature.
ICX-25-700
ICX issued September 1998
279
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Phase 2.0
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service allows an extension user to “carry” his or her toll
restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS Class of Service feature can be used, a Walking Class of Service code must
be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking Class of Service code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter 87.
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking Class of Service code (0001-9999)
5. Enter an exchange line access code (9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) or 81-84)
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking Class of Service remains in
effect until you replace the handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1-08: Walking Class of Service Code
Considerations
280
•
The same Walking Class of Service code can be used on more than one extension.
•
Walking Class of Service mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
•
ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking Class of Service.
•
Before entering a new Walking COS code, you must first clear the existing code.
•
When Walking COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears in Call
Logging.
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
A
Index
About User Programming 70
Access Codes
MCO Trunk
DSLT 238
Key Telephone 187
SLT 278
Account Codes
DSLT 195
Key Telephone 108
Non-verified
Key Telephone 109
SLT 243
Non-Verified ID
DSLT 196
SLT 243
Verified ID
DSLT 197
Key Telephone 110
SLT 244
Alarm Ringing 58
Analog Device Capability
Extension Interface 41
ANSWER key 147
Attendant Group Calls
DSLT 198
Key Telephone 111
SLT 245
Attendant Groups
System 22
Auto Repeat Dial
DSLT 199
Key Telephone 112
Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) 23
Automatic Call Waiting
Camp-on
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
SLT 261
Automatic Day/Night Mode 37
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 23
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer 24
B
Background Music
DSLT 199
Key Telephone 112
System 24
Background Music/MOH Separation 24
Backup
ICX-25-700
Index
Battery 25
Memory 46
Battery Backup 25
BGM/MOH Separation 24
Blocking Outgoing Audio
Mute Function 162
Box
Door 39
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 209
Key Telephone 122
SLT 253
Building Block Expansion Capability 25
Built-In Voice Processing Unit 26
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Ringing 57
Busy Override
DSLT 200
Key Telephone 113
SLT 246
C
Call Barring 60
Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
Setting 100
Call Forward ID Code
Voice Mail (Third Party) 62
Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
Setting 101
Call Forwarding
All Calls
DSLT 202
Key Telephone 116
SLT 248
Busy
DSLT 203
Key Telephone 116
SLT 250
Do-Not-Disturb
DSLT 205
Key Telephone 118
SLT 250
DSLT 202
Key Telephone 115
No Answer
DSLT 203
Key Telephone 117
SLT 249
SLT 247
Call Hold
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 209
Key Telephone 122
ICX issued September 1998
281
Index
SLT 253
DSLT 206
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 208
Key Telephone 122
SLT 253
Floating Hold
Key Telephone 121
SLT 252
Floating HoldDSLT 207
Key Telephone 119
SLT 251
System Hold
DSLT 206
Key Telephone 119
SLT 251
Call Logging
Output Format 59
Call Park
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 123, 209
SLT 255
Call Pickup
DSLT 211
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 212
Key Telephone 126
SLT 256
Extension Group Pickup
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Call Progress Tones 26
Call Routing
Network 53
Call Transfer
DSLT 214
Key Telephone 128
Network 53
SLT 258
Supervised
DSLT 214
Key Telephone 128
SLT 258
Unsupervised
DSLT 215
Key Telephone 129
SLT 259
Call Waiting
(Automatic) Camp-on
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
282
Section 700 - Operation
SLT 261
(Manual) Camp-on
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
SLT 261
Camp-on
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
SLT 260
Callback
Message Key 160
Message Waiting
DSLT 225
Key Telephone 160
SLT 270
Callback Request
DSLT 201
Key Telephone 114
SLT 247
Caller ID Call Log
Key Telephone 131
Caller ID Logging Extensions 102
Setting 102
Calling
Network Extension 53
Camping on Busy Extension
Call Transfer
DSLT 216
Key Telephone 130
SLT 260
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
Automatic
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
SLT 261
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
Manual
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
SLT 261
SLT 260
Centrex/PBX Compatibility 27
Changing Display Contrast
Display Information 142
Circular Hunt Group 44
CIT Capability 34
Class of Service
Walking TRS 192
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction 29
Class of Service - Extension Feature 29
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction 31
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie 28
Class of Service (COS) 28
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
CO Ringing Mode
Alarm Ringing 58
BLF Ringing 57
Day Ringing 55
Delayed Ringing 56
Slide Ringing 57
CO Ringing Types 31
DID Ringing 31
DIL 32
DISA 32
Multiple Ringing 32
CO Trunk Interface 32
CO Trunk Interface - DID 33
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI 33
CO Trunk Interface - Loop Start 34
Compatibility
Centrex/PBX 27
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Capability 34
Conference Calls
Busy Override
DSLT 200
Key Telephone 113
SLT 246
DSLT 218
Eight-Party
DSLT 219
Key Telephone 138
SLT 263
Key Telephone 137
SLT 262
Three-Party
DSLT 218
Key Telephone 138
SLT 262
Connection
Tandem 53
Console
DSS/72 144
EM/24 145
Customizing Tool 55
D
Data Security 34
Date
Setting 71
Day
Setting 71
Day Mode
Automatic 37
Day, Day 2 35
Manual 36
Day of Week Mode
ICX-25-700
Setting 97
Day Ringing 55
Day/Night Mode
Automatic 37
Manual 36
Day/Night System Mode 35
Delayed Ringing 56
Devices
Programming 54
Dialing
Onhook
DSLT 226
Key Telephone 168
DID Trunk Interface 33
Digital Pad 37
Digital Pad Class 37
Direct In Line Ringing
CO Ringing Types 32
Direct Inward Dial Ringing
CO Ringing Types 31
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 38
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing
CO Ringing Types 32
Direct Line Appearances 158
Direct Trunk Access
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 185
SLT 277
DISA 38
Display Information 140
Changing Display Contrast 142
Large Display Phone 140
Small Display Phone 141
Distinctive Ringing 39
Distributed Hunt Group 43
Do-Not-Distrub (DND)
DSLT 220
Key Telephone 142
Do-Not-Disturb
Call Forwarding
DSLT 205
Key Telephone 118
SLT 250
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
SLT 264
Door Box 39
Door Box Sensor 40
Door Phone 39
DP
Signal Conversion
DSLT 222
Key Telephone 143
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
DSLT 222
ICX issued September 1998
283
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone 143
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
Extension Interface 41
DSLT Features 193
DSS/72 Console 144
DSS/BLF Appearances 156
DTMF
Signal Conversion
DSLT 222
Key Telephone 143
Extension Interface 40
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface 41
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface 41
Extension Name Assignments 47
Extension Names
Setting 82
Extension Restriction COS 29
E
Facilities
Network 52
Feature Access Codes
FF Key Assignment 148
FF Key Assignment
Feature Access Codes 148
FF Key Extender
DSS/72 144
EM/24 145
FF Keys 146
Flash Send
SLT 265
Flash Signal
DSLT 222
Key Telephone 145
Flexible Function Keys 146
Flexible Numbering Plan 42
Floating Hold
DSLT 207
Key Telephone 121
SLT 252
Virtual 62
Forwarding
All Calls
DSLT 202
Key Telephone 116
SLT 248
Busy
DSLT 203
Key Telephone 116
SLT 250
Do-Not-Disturb
DSLT 205
Key Telephone 118
SLT 250
DSLT 202
Key Telephone 115
No Answer
DSLT 203
Key Telephone 117
SLT 249
SLT 247
Free Slot 42
F
Eight-Party Conference Calls
DSLT 219
Key Telephone 138
SLT 263
EM/24 Console 145
Exception Day Mode
Setting 95
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 208
Key Telephone 122
SLT 253
Expansion Capability 25
Extension
Set Call Forward Busy Destination 100
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination 101
Extension Calling 53
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 212
Key Telephone 126
SLT 256
Extension Feature COS 29
Extension Group Pickup
All Calls
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
DSLT 211
External Calls
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Specified Group Pickup
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Extension Inferface
Analog Device Capability 41
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs) 41
284
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
H
Handset
Mute Function 162
Handsfree
Answerback
Key Telephone 151
Operation
Key Telephone 152
Handsfree Answerback
Key Telephone 151
Handsfree Operation
Key Telephone 152
Headset Operation 153
Hold
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 209
Key Telephone 122
SLT 253
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 208
Key Telephone 122
SLT 253
Floating Hold
DSLT 207
Key Telephone 121
SLT 252
Music 46
System Hold
DSLT 206
Key Telephone 119
SLT 251
Hot Dial Pad 153
Hot Line
DSLT 223
Key Telephone 154
Hunt Group
Circular 44
Next Extension 44
Pilot Distributed 43
Pilot Terminal 43
Switch Back 44
Hunting Groups 43
I
ID Codes
Setting 85
Intercom Calling
DSLT 223
Key Telephone 155
SLT 267
ICX-25-700
Index
Tone Calling
DSLT 223
Key Telephone 155
SLT 267
Voice Calling
DSLT 223
Key Telephone 155
SLT 267
Interface
Extension 40
ISDN/BRI 41
ISDN/PRI 41
Trunk 32
Internal Hold Tone 45
ISDN PRI Trunk Interface 33
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
Extension Interface 41
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
Extension Interface 41
K
key
ANSWER 147, 148
Key Telephone
Illustration 108
Multi-CO (MCO) appearances
Key Telephone Features 105
158
L
Large Display Phone
Display Information 140
Last Number Redial
DSLT 224
Key Telephone 156
SLT 268
Line Appearances 156
Direct Line Appearances 158
DSS/BLF Appearances 156
Line appearances
Multi-CO (MCO) 158
List of features 13
Loop Start Trunk Interface 34
M
Maintenance
Power On 54
User 69
Manual Call Waiting
Camp-on
ICX issued September 1998
285
Index
DSLT 217
Key Telephone 136
SLT 261
Manual Day/Night Mode 36
MCO Line Preference 186
MCO Tenant Group 45
MCO Trunk Access
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 186
SLT 278
MCO Trunk Access Codes
DSLT 238
Key Telephone 187
SLT 278
Meet-Me Answer
Paging
DSLT 229
Key Telephone 169
SLT 271
Memory Backup 46
Message Key
Message Wait Callback 160
Priorty Message Wait Callback 160
Message Key ID Code
Setting 86
Voice Mail (Third Party) 65
Message Keys 160
Message Wait Callback
Message Key 160
Message Waiting (High Priority)
Voice Mail 64
Message Waiting/Callback
DSLT 225
Key Telephone 160
SLT 270
Mode
Day of Week Mode 97
Exception Day 95
Special Day 89
Mode Schedule
Setting 87
MOH 24
Multi-CO (MCO) appearances 158
Multiple Ringing
CO Ringing Types 32
Music
Background
DSLT 199
Key Telephone 112
Music-on-Hold (Background)
DSLT 199
Key Telephone 112
Music-on-Hold (MOH) 46
Mute Function 162
286
Section 700 - Operation
N
Name Assignments 46
Extension 47
Speed Dial 50, 177
Names
Extension 82
Network 53
Network Call Routing 53
Network Call Transfer 53
Network Extension Calling 53
Network Facilities 52
Network Call Routing 53
Network Call Transfer 53
Network Extension Calling 53
Network Paging 53
Tandem Connection 53
Network Paging 53
Next Extension/Hunt Group 44
Night Mode
Automatic 37
Manual 36
Night, Night 2, Night 3 35
Non-Blocking Architecture 53
Non-verified Account Codes
Key Telephone 109
SLT 243
Non-Verified ID Account Codes
DSLT 196
Numbering Plan
Flexible 42
O
Offhook
Monitor
Key Telephone 163
Signaling
DSLT 227
Key Telephone 163, 268
Voice Announce
DSLT 228
Key Telephone 164
SLT 269
Offhook Monitor
Key Telephone 163
Offhook Signaling
DSLT 227
Key Telephone 163, 268
Offhook Voice Announce
DSLT 228
Key Telephone 164
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
SLT 269
One-Touch Keys 166
Onhook Dialing
DSLT 226
Key Telephone 168
P
Pad
Digital 37
Pad Class 37
Paging
DSLT 229
Key Telephone 169
Meet-Me Answer
DSLT 229
Key Telephone 169
SLT 271
Network 53
SLT 271
PBX Compatability 27
PC-Based Customizing Tool 55
Personal Speed Dialing (PSD)
DSLT 231
Key Telephone 171
SLT 273
Pickup
DSLT 211
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 212
Key Telephone 126
SLT 256
Extension Group Pickup
All Calls
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
DSLT 211
External Calls
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Specific Group
DSLT 211
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Key Telephone 125
SLT 255
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group 43
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group 43
ICX-25-700
Index
Port
Virtual 61
Power Failure Transfer 54
Power On Maintenance 54
Priority Message Wait Callback
Message Key 160
Programing Devices
Telephone 55
Programming Devices 54
PC-Based Customizing Tool 55
Programming Telephone 55
Progress Tones 26
PSD Names
Setting 73
PSD Numbers
Setting 72
R
Redial
Last Number
DSLT 224
Key Telephone 156
SLT 268
Redial Key
Busy Tone
DSLT 199
Key Telephone 112
Last Number
DSLT 224
Key Telephone 156
RELEASE key 148
Reset Call
DSLT 230
Key Telephone 170
SLT 272
Restriction
Ext to Ext COS 29
Ringing
Alarm 58
BLF 57
Day 55
Delayed 56
DID 31
DIL 32
DISA 32
Distinctive 39
Slide 57
Ringing Line Preference 171
ICX issued September 1998
287
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone 171
SLT 273
S
Schedule
Setting 87
Security
Data 34
Sensor
Door Box 40
Separation
BGM/MOH 24
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension 100
Set Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail 85
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension 101
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions 102
Set Day of Week Mode 97
Set Exception Day Mode 95
Set Extension Names 82
Set Message Key ID Code 86
Set Mode Schedule 87
Set PSD Names 73
Set PSD Numbers 72
Set Special Day Mode 89
Set SSD Index 80
Set SSD Names 79
Set SSD Numbers 78
Set System Date/Time/Day 71
Set Verified ID Codes 83
Set Walking TRS Codes 99
Signal Conversion
DP to DTMF
DSLT 222
Key Telephone 143
Single Line Telephone (SLT) Features 241
Slide Ringing 57
SLT Flash Send 265
Small Display Phone
Display Information 141
SMDR 58
SMDR (Call Logging)
Output data format 59
Software Version 11
Special Day Mode
Setting 89
Speed Dial Linking
DSLT 234
Key Telephone 176
SLT 275
Speed Dial Name Assignments 50, 177
Speed Dialing
DSLT 231
Key Telephone 171
Personal
DSLT 231
288
SLT 273
System
DSLT 233
Key Telephone 174
SLT 274
S-Point Interface
ISDN/BRI 41
ISDN/PRI 41
SSD Index
Setting 80
SSD Names
Setting 79
SSD Numbers
Setting 78
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Supervised Call Transfer
DSLT 214
Key Telephone 128
SLT 258
Switch Back Hunt Group 44
System
Background Music 24
System Features 19
System Hold
DSLT 206
Key Telephone 119
SLT 251
System Mode
Day 35
Day/Night 35
Night 35
System Speed Dialing (SSD)
DSLT 233
Key Telephone 174
SLT 274
58
T
Tandem Connection 53
Telephone Programming 55
Tenant Operation
MCO 45
Third Party Voice Mail 62
Three-Party Conference Calls
DSLT 218
Key Telephone 138
SLT 262
Time
Setting 71
Timed Reminder Call
DSLT 235
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
Key Telephone 183
SLT 276
Toll 60
Toll Restriction Service 60
Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring)
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) 55
Tone
Internal Hold 45
Tone Calling
Intercom Calling
DSLT 223
Key Telephone 155
SLT 267
Tones
Call Progress 26
Transfer
Automatic Trunk To Trunk 24
Camping on Busy Extension
DSLT 216
Key Telephone 130
SLT 260
DSLT 214
Key Telephone 128
Network Call 53
Power Failure 54
SLT 258
Supervised
DSLT 214
Key Telephone 128
SLT 258
Unsupervised
DSLT 215
Key Telephone 129
SLT 259
TRS 55
TRS Codes
Walking 99
Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 185
SLT 277
MCO
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 186
SLT 278
MCO Line Preference 186
Trunk Interface 32
DID 33
Loop Start 34
Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI 33
Trunk to Trunk Restriction COS 31
Trunk To Trunk Transfer
Automatic 24
ICX-25-700
Trunk/Tie COS 28
U
60
Unsupervised Call Transfer
DSLT 215
Key Telephone 129
SLT 259
User Maintenance 69
User Programming 70
V
Variable Mode 188
Verified ID Account Codes
DSLT 197
Key Telephone 110
SLT 244
Verified ID Codes
Setting 83
Virtual Extension 62
Virtual Port 61
Floating Hold 62
Virtual Extension 62
Voice Calling
Intercom Calling
DSLT 223
Key Telephone 155
SLT 267
Voice Mail
Call Forward ID Code (Third Party) 62
High Priority Message Waiting 64
Message Key ID Code (Third Party) 65
Voice Mail ID Codes
Setting 85
Voice Mail Integration
Third Party 62
Voice Mail Transfer Key 65
Voice Processing Unit 26
Voice Recognition 190
Volume Control 191
W
Walking TRS Class of Service
Walking TRS Codes
Setting 99
ICX issued September 1998
192
289
Index
Section 700 - Operation
3DQDVRQLF7HOHSKRQH6\VWHPV
See More
Panasonic Manuals
290
www.voicesonic.com
Phone 877-289-2829
ICX issued September 1998
ICX-25-700
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement